OptiFDTD

Version 8.1 for Windows 2000/Vista/XPTM 32/64 bit

Technical Background and Tutorials

Finite Difference Time Domain Photonics Simulation Software

OptiFDTD
Technical Background and Tutorials
Finite Difference Time Domain Photonics Simulation Software

Copyright 2009 Optiwave

All rights reserved. All OptiFDTD documents, including this one, and the information contained therein, is copyright material. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means whatsoever, including recording, photocopying, or faxing, without prior written approval of Optiwave.

Disclaimer
Optiwave makes no representation or warranty with respect to the adequacy of this documentation or the programs which it describes for any particular purpose or with respect to its adequacy to produce any particular result. In no event shall Optiwave, its employees, its contractors or the authors of this documentation, be liable for special, direct, indirect, or consequential damages, losses, costs, charges, claims, demands, or claim for lost profits, fees, or expenses of any nature or kind.

Technical support
If you purchased Optiwave software from a distributor that is not listed here, please send technical questions to your distributor.

Optiwave Systems Inc.

Tel Fax

Canada/US East
E-mail URL

(613) 224-4700 (613) 224-4706

[email protected] www.optiwave.com

Cybernet Systems Co., Ltd.

Tel Fax

Japan
E-mail URL

+81 (03) 5978-5414 +81 (03) 5978-6082

[email protected] www.cybernet.co.jp

Optiwave Europe
Tel Fax

Europe
E-mail URL

+33 (0) 494 08 27 97 +33 (0) 494 33 65 76

[email protected] www.optiwave.eu

Table of Contents
Installing OptiFDTD ......................................................................................... 1
Hardware and software requirements..................................................................... 1 Protection key ........................................................................................................... 1 OptiFDTD directory ................................................................................................... 2 Installation ................................................................................................................. 2

FDTD Basics..................................................................................................... 3
2D FDTD Equations................................................................................................... 3
TE waves ..........................................................................................................................4 TM waves .........................................................................................................................7

3D FDTD Equations................................................................................................... 8 Output data .............................................................................................................. 13

Material Models .............................................................................................. 15

Lossy dielectrics .............................................................................................................15 Lorentz dispersion materials...........................................................................................16 Nonlinear material model................................................................................................18 Dispersive second-order nonlinear material.............................................................19 Dispersive third-order nonlinear material .................................................................19 Dispersive Kerr effect...............................................................................................19 Dispersive Raman effect ..........................................................................................20 Nonlinearity simulation .............................................................................................21 Lorentz-Drude Model ......................................................................................................22 Lorentz-Drude Model in Frequency Domain ............................................................22 Lorentz-Drude Model in Time Domain .....................................................................23 Lorentz-Drude model user interface in OptiFDTD....................................................24

References:.............................................................................................................. 25
Lorentz_Drude parameters for selected materials..........................................................26 Ag-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters.......................................................................26 Au-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters.......................................................................27 Cu-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters ......................................................................28 Al-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters........................................................................29 Be-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters.......................................................................30 Cr-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters .......................................................................31 Ni-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters........................................................................32 Pd-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters.......................................................................33 Pt-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters........................................................................34

Ti-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters ........................................................................35 W-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters........................................................................36

OptiFDTD Boundary Conditions................................................................... 37

PML Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................... 37 PMC/PEC boundary conditions and plane wave simulation............................... 38
Image value of PEC/ PMC..............................................................................................38 Plane wave realized in symmetric/periodic structure......................................................40

PBC Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................... 42

Input Wave...................................................................................................... 43
Incident wave source excitation Total/Reflected field formulation..............................43 CW excitation .................................................................................................................44 Pulsed excitation ............................................................................................................44 Point Source ...................................................................................................................44 Gaussian Beam Size ......................................................................................................45 2D Total Field /Scattering Field (TF/SF) region. .............................................................46

2D FDTD Band Solver.................................................................................... 48

Simulation concept introduction......................................................................................48 Basic equation for TE mode 2D simulation ..............................................................49 Basic equation for TM mode 2D simulation .............................................................49 Bloch's boundary condition.............................................................................................49 Initial excitation ...............................................................................................................50 Unit cell and Brillouin zone .............................................................................................51

References:.............................................................................................................. 52

Post-simulation Data Analysis ..................................................................... 53

Discretized Fourier Transform (DFT) and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) .......... 53 Power calculation and Poynting vector ................................................................ 53
Overlap Integral (OI) .......................................................................................................54 Mode Overlap Integral (MOI) ..........................................................................................54 Input Overlap Integral (IOI) .............................................................................................54 Input Overlap Integral Scan (IOIS) .................................................................................55

Far Field Transform ................................................................................................ 55

Fraunhofer approximation ..............................................................................................55 Fresnel-Kirchhoff Diffraction Formula .............................................................................56

Heating Absorption................................................................................................. 57 RCS Calculation ...................................................................................................... 58 References:.............................................................................................................. 60

Plane Wave Expansion (PWE) method ........................................................ 61

References:.............................................................................................................. 62

Power Transmittance Calculation with VB Scripting ................................. 63

References:.............................................................................................................. 64 FDTD basic references ........................................................................................... 64 Material models ....................................................................................................... 64 Anisotropic Perfectly Matched Layer (Anisotropic PML) boundary conditions 64 Nonlinearity ............................................................................................................. 64

Tutorials.......................................................................................................... 67 Introduction to the layout designer concept............................................... 69 Know the difference between 32-bit and 64-bit simulations...................... 95 Lesson 1Getting started ............................................................................ 99
Create a new project ............................................................................................. 101 Create a design ..................................................................................................... 111 Set up the Input Plane .......................................................................................... 117 Observe the Refractive Index Distribution ......................................................... 126 Set up observation points, areas, and lines ....................................................... 128 Run the simulation................................................................................................ 132 Analyze the simulation results ............................................................................ 141 Export results ........................................................................................................ 155

Lesson 2Input wave setup....................................................................... 157

Time Domain Input Wave formation.......................................................................157 Transverse field distribution ...................................................................................157 Polarization formation ............................................................................................157 Input Wave direction ..............................................................................................157 Power .....................................................................................................................157 Amplitude ...............................................................................................................157

Point Source .......................................................................................................... 171

Lesson 3Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation ............ 175
Sample 1---PGB Layout ........................................................................................ 175 Sample 2---Plane wave simulation based on the periodic cell of PhC............. 194

Sample 3---Periodic Boundary Condition for PBG simulation ......................... 204

Lesson 4Multiple resonant Lorentz dispersive material simulation ... 207 Lesson 5Drude model for noble metal and surface plasma simulation ... 219 Lesson 62nd-Order nonlinearity simulation .......................................... 229
2nd Order nonlinear material simulation.......................................................................229

Lesson 7Four wave mixing ..................................................................... 247 Lesson 8Plane wave simulation ............................................................. 261
2D-TE plane wave in unique material...........................................................................261 3D-Y-direction polarized plane wave in unique material...............................................266

Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver .................................................................... 269

Photonic crystal structure .............................................................................................269 Band Solver parameters ...............................................................................................274

Lesson 10 - Lorentz_Drude model for metal and surface plasma simulation 279
Creating a project with Lorentz-Drude material......................................................280 Enhancement .........................................................................................................282 Discussion:.............................................................................................................290

Lesson 11 - Analyzing 1D Photonic Crystals (Bragg gratings) ............... 293

Introduction ........................................................................................................... 293
Define the Lattice Structure ..........................................................................................293 PWE Band Solver Parameters .....................................................................................298 Run Simulation and View Results ................................................................................300 Bragg grating with layers of different width...................................................................301 Off-axis propagation .....................................................................................................302

References:............................................................................................................ 303

Lesson 12 - Analyzing 2D Photonic Crystals ............................................ 305

Introduction ........................................................................................................... 305
1. Create a 2D rectangular lattice of dielectric cylinders ........................................305

2. PWE Band Solver Parameters...........................................................................307 3. Simulation Results .............................................................................................308 Inversion Symmetry and Domain Origin ................................................................309 2D hexagonal lattice...............................................................................................310 Rotated 2D lattice...................................................................................................312

References:............................................................................................................ 312

Lesson 13 - Analyzing 3D Photonic Crystals ............................................ 313

Introduction ........................................................................................................... 313
1. FCC lattices of Air Spheres in Dielectric..................................................................313 1.1 Create a 3D rectangular lattice of dielectric spheres .......................................313 1.2 Set simulation parameters ...............................................................................315 2. Diamond Lattice of Air Spheres in Dielectric ............................................................318 2.2 Layout design of the diamond lattice................................................................318 2.2 Set parameters and run simulation ..................................................................319

References:............................................................................................................ 320

Lesson 14 - Analyzing 2D Defects in Photonic Crystals.......................... 321

Introduction ........................................................................................................... 321
1. Square 2D lattice ......................................................................................................321 1.1 Setting and Simulating Supercell .....................................................................321 1.2 Setting up a defect ...........................................................................................323

References:............................................................................................................ 327

Lesson 15 - Simulations of Gratings Created with VB Script.................. 329

Introduce the layout.............................................................................................. 329
Define a 2D grating layout with VB scripting.................................................................330 Setup simulation parameters ........................................................................................334 Perform the simulation..................................................................................................334 Perform far field analysis for the diffraction wave. ........................................................334

Lesson 16 Calculating Power Transmittance and Reflection using VB Script............................................................................................................. 337 Lesson 17 - Analysis of Photonic Crystal Fibers (PCF) in OptiFDTD ..... 341
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 341 Sample 1- Photonic Crystal Fiber-Holey Fiber ................................................... 342 Create the layout ................................................................................................... 343 Convert Refractive index distribution to a file ................................................... 353

Perform the Modal analysis ................................................................................. 354 Perform the wavelength scanning mode analysis............................................. 357

Lesson 18 - Simulations with 64-bit 3D Simulator.................................... 361

Create a new Layout ............................................................................................. 362
Layout creation steps ...................................................................................................362 Define Input Wave ........................................................................................................365

Define Simulation Parameters ............................................................................. 367

Observe the Refractive Index .......................................................................................369 Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector) ..................................................371 Perform the 64Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation...................................................................374

Post-Simulation Data Analysis ............................................................................ 377

Observation Point .........................................................................................................377 Field pattern in Observation Area .................................................................................380 Power transmission/reflection function .........................................................................383

Lesson 19 - Heating absorption simulation using 64bit processor ........ 385

.............................................................................................................. 391 ........................................................................................ 393 () .................................................................... 396 ( ) .......................................... 397 64 .................................................................399 .................................................................................. 400

Lesson 20 - 2D Total Field/Scattering Field(TF/SF) simulation and Radar Cross Section(RCS) Detection ................................................................... 403
Layout creation steps ...................................................................................................403 Define Input Wave ........................................................................................................405 Define Simulation Parameters ......................................................................................410 Perform the 32Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation...................................................................411 Observe Steady state response in Analyzer ................................................................412 RCS calculation for an infinity cylinder .........................................................................413

Reference:.............................................................................................................. 417

Lesson 21 Simulation on 3D surface Plasmon based layout ................ 419

Example 1 nano-gold particle simulation ........................................................ 419
Layout Creation steps...................................................................................................419 Define Input Wave ........................................................................................................422

Define Simulation Parameters ............................................................................. 423

Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector)....................................... 424

Perform the 64Bit-FDTD Simulation .............................................................................425 Post-Simulation Data Analysis .....................................................................................426

Example 2 Simulate Sub wavelenght holes in metallic film.............................. 428

Layout Creation steps...................................................................................................428 Design VB script code to Scan the hole width ..............................................................433 Define Input Wave ........................................................................................................434

Define Simulation Parameters ............................................................................. 435

Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector) ..................................................435 Perform the VB scripting Scanning 64Bit-FDTD Simulation .........................................437 Post-Simulation Data Analysis .....................................................................................437

Installing OptiFDTD
Before installing OptiFDTD, ensure the system requirements described below are available.

Hardware and software requirements

OptiFDTD requires the following minimum system configuration: Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows XP 64/Vista 64-bit to run 64-bit simulators Personal computer with Pentium Processor 900 MHz (or higher) 512 MB of RAM (or higher) 500 MB to 10 GB free hard drive disk space (recommended) depending on calculation size for software operations 1024 x 768 graphic resolution, minimum 256 colors Internet Explorer 5.5 (or higher) DirectX8.1 (or higher) Most recent video drivers for your graphics card Note: For machines running Windows XP, the Windows Classic theme must be used.

Protection key
A hardware protection key is supplied with the software. To ensure that OptiFDTD operates properly, verify the following: The protection key is properly connected to the parallel port of the computer. If you use more than one protection key, ensure that there is no conflict between the OptiFDTD protection key and the other keys. Note: Use a switch box to prevent protection key conflicts. Ensure that the cable between the switch box and the computer is a maximum of one meter long.

USERS REFERENCE INSTALLING OPTIFDTD

OptiFDTD directory
By default, the OptiFDTD installer creates an OptiFDTD directory on your hard disk. The OptiFDTD directory contains the following subdirectories: \BIN contains executable files, dynamic linked libraries, and help files \SAMPLES contains OptiFDTD examples \TMP temporary directory used by OptiFDTD during operation \DOC OptiFDTD support documentation

Installation
OptiFDTD can be installed on Windows 2000/XP/Vista/XP 64/Vista 64. We recommend that you exit all Windows programs before running the setup program.

Installing OptiFDTD on Windows operating systems

To install OptiFDTD on Windows operating systems, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Log on as the Administrator, or log onto an account with Administrator privileges. Insert the OptiFDTD installation CD into your CD ROM drive. On the Taskbar, click Start and select Run. The Run dialog box appears. In the Run dialog box, type F:\setup.exe, where F is your CD ROM drive. Click OK and follow the screen instructions and prompts. When the installation is complete, remove the CD from the CD ROM drive and reboot your computer.

FDTD Basics
OptiFDTD is a powerful, highly integrated, user-friendly software that allows computer aided design and simulation of advanced passive photonic components. The OptiFDTD software package is based on the finite-difference time-domain (FDTD) method. The FDTD method has been established as a powerful engineering tool for integrated and diffractive optics device simulations. This is due to its unique combination of features, such as the ability to model light propagation, scattering and diffraction, and reflection and polarization effects. It can also model material anisotropy and dispersion without any pre-assumption of field behavior such as the slowly varying amplitude approximation. The method allows for the effective and powerful simulation and analysis of sub-micron devices with very fine structural details. A sub-micron scale implies a high degree of light confinement and correspondingly, the large refractive index difference of the materials (mostly semiconductors) to be used in a typical device design.

2D FDTD Equations
The FDTD approach is based on a direct numerical solution of the time-dependent Maxwell's curl equations. The first version of OptiFDTD is in 2D. The photonic device is laid out in the X-Z plane. The propagation is along Z. The Y-direction is assumed to be infinite. This assumption removes all the y derivatives from Maxwell's equations and splits them into two (TE and TM) independent sets of equations. The 2D computational domain is shown in Figure 1. The space steps in the X and Z directions are x and z , respectively. Each mesh point is associated with a specific

FDTD BASICS

type of material and contains information about its properties such as refractive index, and dispersion parameters.
Figure 1 Numerical representation of the 2D computational domain

TE waves
In the 2D TE case (Hx, Ey, Hz - nonzero components, propagation along Z, transverse field variations along X) in lossless media, Maxwell's equations take the following form:

1 H H E y ------- = -- --------x --------z , z t x

1- EH x -------- = ---- -------y , 0 z t

1- EH z -------- = ---- -------y 0 x t

(1)

where = 0 r is the dielectric permittivity and the vacuum. The refractive index is n = r .

0 is the magnetic permeability of

Each field is represented by a 2D array Ey(i,k), Hx(i,k) and Hz(i,k) corresponding to the 2D mesh grid given in Figure 1. The indices i and k account for the number of space steps in the X and Z direction, respectively. In the case of TE, the location of the fields in the mesh is shown in Figure 2.

FDTD BASICS

Figure 2 Location of the TE fields in the computational domain

The TE fields stencil can be explained as follows. The Ey field locations coincide with the mesh nodes given in Figure 1. In Figure 2, the solid lines represent the mesh given in Figure 1. The Ey field is considered to be the center of the FDTD space cell. The dashed lines form the FDTD cells. The magnetic fields Hx and Hz are associated with cell edges. The locations of the electric fields are associated with integer values of the indices i and k. The Hx field is associated with integer i and (k + 0.5) indices. The Hz field is associated with (i + 0.5) and integer k indices. The numerical analog in Equation 1 can be derived from the following relation:

1 H H E y ------- = -- --------x --------z z t x

(2)

FDTD BASICS

E y ( i ,k ) E y ( i ,k ) ----------------------------------------------- = t

n1

( i ,k + 1 2 ) H x ( i ,k + 1 2 ) 1 H z ( i + 1 2, k ) H z ( i 1 2, k ) Hx - + 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------z x

n12

n12

n12

n12

The total set of numerical Equation 1 takes the form:

t- n 1 2 n n1 n12 E y ( i ,k ) = E y ( i ,k ) + -------- [ H x ( i ,k + 1 2 ) H x ( i ,k 1 2 ) ] z t- n 1 2 n12 -------- [ H z ( i + 1 2, k ) H z ( i 1 2, k ) ] x

n+12 n12

Hx

( i, k + 1 2 ) = H x

t n - n ( i, k + 1 2 ) + ----------- [ E y ( i, k + 1 ) E y ( i, k ) ] 0 z
n t - n ( i + 1 2, k ) ----------- [ E y ( i + 1, k ) E y ( i, k ) ] 0 x

(3)

Hz

n+12

( i + 1 2, k ) = H x

n12

The superscript n labels the time steps while the indices i and k label the space steps and x and z along the x and z directions, respectively. This is the so-called Yee's numerical scheme applied to the 2D TE case. It uses central difference approximations for the numerical derivatives in space and time, both having secondorder accuracy. The sampling in space is on a sub-wavelength scale. Typically, 10 to 20 steps per wavelength are needed. The sampling in time is selected to ensure numerical stability of the algorithm. The time step is determined by the Courant limit:

t 1 ( c 1 ( x ) + 1 ( z ) )

FDTD BASICS

TM waves
In the 2D TM case (Ex, Hy, Ez nonzero components, propagation along Z, transverse field variations along X) in lossless media, Maxwell's equations take the following form:

1- E E H --------y = ---- -------x -------z , 0 z t x

1 HE x ------- = -- --------y, z t

1 HE -------z = -- --------y x t

(4)

The location of the TM fields in the computational domain follows the same philosophy and is shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 Location of the TM fields in the computational domain shown in Figure 112

Now, the electric field components Ex and Ez are associated with the cell edges, while the magnetic field Hy is located at the cell center. The TM algorithm can be presented in a way similar to Equation 3.

FDTD BASICS

3D FDTD Equations
In 3D simulations, the simulation domain is a cubic box, the space steps are Dy ,and Dz in x, y, and z directions respectively.

Dx ,

Each field components is presented by a 3D array ---Ex(i,j,k), Ey(i,j,k), Ez(i,j,k), Hx(i,j,k), Hy(i,j,k), Hz(i,j,k). The field components position in Yee's Cell are shown in Figure 4. These placements and the notation show that the E and H components are interleaved at intervals of 1 2Dh in space and 1 2Dt for the purpose of implementing a leapfrog algorithm.

Ez (i,j-1 ,k-1/2 ) Hx (i,j-1/2,k -1/2 ) Ey (i,j-1/2 ,k-1 ) Ey (i,j-1/2 ,k) Ez (i,j,k -1/2) (i,j,k)

Ex (i-1/2 ,j-1,k )

Hz (i-1/2 ,j-1 /2,k ) Hy (i-1/2 ,j,k -1/2 ) Ex (i-1/2 ,j,k-1 ) Ey (i-1 ,j-1 /2,k ) Ex (i-1/2 ,j,k)

x z y

Ez (i-1 ,j,k-1/2 )

Figure 4 Displacement of the electric and magnetic field vector components about a cubic unit cell of the Yee space lattice

Now we can apply the above finite-difference ideas, notations, and field displacements to achieve a numerical approximation of Maxwell's equation (1.3-1.4).

FDTD BASICS

The FDTD can be written as: 1.11a

H xn,+,1j/21 / 2,k 1 / 2 = H xn,,1j/21 / 2,k 1 / 2 + i i

1.11b
n / n / H y ,+11 22, j ,k 1 / 2 = H y ,1122, j ,k 1 / 2 + i / i /

t n n ( E y ,i , j 1 / 2,k E y ,i , j 1 / 2,k 1 ) 0 z t ( E zn,i , j ,k 1 / 2 E zn,i , j 1,k 1 / 2 ) 0 y

t ( E zn,i , j ,k 1 / 2 E zn,i 1, j ,k 1 / 2 ) 0 x t ( E xn,i 1 / 2, j ,k E xn,i 1 / 2, j ,k 1 ) 0 z

1.11c
1 1/ H zn,+1/ /22, j 1 / 2,k = H zn,1 /22, j 1 / 2,k + i i

t ( E xn,i 1 / 2, j ,k E xn,i 1 / 2, j 1,k ) 0 y t n n ( E y ,i , j 1 / 2,k E y ,i 1, j 1 / 2,k ) 0 x

1.12a
1 E xn,+1 / 2, j ,k = i

2 t n E x 1 / 2,i , j ,k 2 + t 2t 1 1 + ( H zn,+1/ /22, j +1 / 2,k H zn,+1/ /22, j 1 / 2,k ) i i (2 + t )y 2t n / n / ( H y ,+11 22, j ,k +1 / 2 H y ,+11 22, j ,k 1 / 2 ) i / i / (2 + t )z

1.12b
n E y ,+1j 1 / 2,k = i,

2 t n E y ,i , j 1 / 2,k 2 + t 2t ( H xn,+,1j/21 / 2,k +1 / 2 H xn,+,1j/21 / 2,k 1 / 2 ) + i i (2 + t )z 2t 1 1 ( H zn,++1/ /22, j 1 / 2,k H zn,+1/ /22, j 1 / 2,k ) i i (2 + t )x

FDTD BASICS

1.12c

E zn,+,1j ,k 1 / 2 = i

2 t n E z ,i , j ,k 1 / 2 2 + t 2t n / n / ( H y ,+1122, j ,k 1 / 2 H y ,+11 22, j ,k 1 / 2 ) + i+ / i / (2 + t )x 2t ( H xn,+,1j/+21 / 2,k 1 / 2 H xn,+,1j/+21 / 2,k 1 / 2 ) i i (2 + t )y

10

FDTD BASICS

Space Step and Time Step

The fundamental constraint of FDTD method is the step size both for the time and space. Space and time steps relate to the accuracy, numerical dispersion, and the stability of the FDTD method. Many references and books have discussed these problems. In general, to keep the results as accurate as possible, with a low numerical dispersive, the mesh size often quoted is "10 cells per wavelength", meaning that the side of each cell should be 1/10 or less at the highest frequency (shortest wavelength). Please note that FDTD is a volumetric computational method, so that if some portion of the computational space is filled with penetrable material, you must use the wavelength in the material to determine the maximum cell size. The following equation is for the suggested mesh size: 1.15

min imum(x, y, z )

min 10n max

where nmax is the maximum refractive index value in the computational domain. Once the cell size is determined, the maximum size for the time step follows the Courant-Friedrichs-Levy (CFL) condition. For 3D FDTD simulation, the CFL condition is: 1.16

t immediately

t v

1 1 1 1 + + 2 2 (x) (y ) (z ) 2

where v is the speed of the light in medium. For 2D simulations, the above CFL condition can be simplified as:

t v

1 1 1 + 2 (x) (z ) 2

11

FDTD BASICS

OptiFDTD Simulation Procedures

The following is the flow chart for the FDTD simulation in OptiFDTD. It also details the work flow in OptiFDTD.

BUILD OBJECT (LAYOUT)

DEFINE PARAMETERS

OptiFDTD Designer

PREPARE INPUT FIELD

START SIMULATION UPDATE H FIELD UPDATE E FIELD

OptiFDTD Simulator

DFT ANALYSIS

No

Time steps n<N max? Yes POST DATA ANALYSIS l i OptiFDTD Analyzer

Figure 5 FDTD Simulation Flow Chart in OptiFDTD

12

FDTD BASICS

Output data
The fields propagated by the FDTD algorithm are the time domain fields. At each location of the computational domain they have a form similar to that given in Equation 8:

E y ( x ,z ) = BG ( x ,z ) sin ( t + i )

(5)

where B is the amplitude of the field at that particular location, G is the wave profile, and i is the corresponding phase. However, the values of B and i are not accessible from the time domain field values. In order to get the full amplitude/phase wave information, we need the stationary complex fields that correspond to the waveform Equation 5. The complex fields are the source of all useful information, such as output and reflected powers, overlap integrals with modal fields, etc. Those complex fields are calculated by a run time Fourier transform performed in the last time period of the simulation. The final complex fields can be visualized at specific Output Planes located properly in the computational domain.
Figure 6 Output Planes

13

FDTD BASICS

The Output Plane located on the right side of the Input Plane is in the Total Field Region and collects the Total Field data. The Output Plane on the left of the Input Plane is in the Reflected Field Region and collects Reflected Field data. It is also called the Reflection Plane. Output planes can also be situated along the Z axis.

14

MATERIAL MODELS

Material Models
One of the main advantages of the FDTD approach is the lack of approximations for the propagating fieldlight is modeled in its full richness and complexity. The other significant advantage is the great variety of materials that can be consistently modeled within the FDTD context. In this sub-section we make a brief review of some of the main material properties that can be handled

Lossy dielectrics
Before proceeding with a more detailed description it should be emphasized that the fact that in the time domain all the fields (Hx, Ey, Hz) are real quantities. Thus, accounting for loss is possible only through a non-zero conductivity of the medium:

E H = 0 r ------ + E = i 0 r i -------- E = i 0 eff E 0 t

where

(6)

Re Im 2 eff = r i -------- = e + i r = ( n + i ) 0
Here we have assumed that

Ee
and

it

---- i t
corresponds to time-to-frequency domain Fourier transform. The real and imaginary part of the permitivity can be expressed through the real and imaginary part of the refractive index:

r = n , r = 2n, = 2 0 n

Re

Im

(7)

15

MATERIAL MODELS

This makes the refractive index approach and the conductivity approach equivalent.

Lorentz dispersion materials

By Lorentz dispersion materials, we mean materials for which the frequency dependence of the dielectric permitivity can be described by a sum of multiple resonance Lorentzian functions:

0 Gm 0m r ( ) = + --------------------------------------- , 2 2 0 m + i m
m=1

G
m=1

= 1

(8)

where

0 m Gm m 0 = s
and

are the resonant frequencies is related to the oscillator strengths is the damping coefficient is the permittivity at infinite frequency is the permittivity at

= 0.

In the lossless case Equation 8 is directly related to the Sellmeier equation which in the three resonances can be presented as:

2 2 A3 A2 A1 n = + ---------------2 + ---------------2 + --------------- , A m = 0 G m, ( m = 1, 2, 3 ) 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2

(9)

In the lossy case, the Sellmeier equation can be written in a generalized form, accounting for a non-zero damping coefficient m as well as for anisotropy in the dispersion properties:

A1 A2 A3 n ( ) = + ----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------2 2 2 2 2 2 + i 1 1 + i 2 2 + i 3 3

2

(10)

16

MATERIAL MODELS

There are different ways to implement Equation 8 into the FDTD formalism. Here we consider the so-called polarization equation approach in the single resonance case. It uses the dielectric susceptibility function:

0 0 ( ) = ---------------------------------2 2 0 + i

(11)

and the relation between the polarization and the electric field P y = 0 ( )E y . Taking the Fourier transform of the last equation leads to the following differential equation:

2 P Py 2 2 --------- + -------y + 0 P y = 0 0 0 E y 2 t t

(12)

By substituting

P -------y = J y the above equation becomes: t J y 2 2 ------ + J y + 0 P y = 0 0 0 E y t

(13)

Then Equation 13 is solved numerically together with the modified Equation 1:

D E P H x H z -------- -------- = --------y = -------y + -------y z x t t t

(14)

The FDTD approach can also account for a large variety of materials such as Drude dispersion materials, perfect metal, second-order, and third-order materials.

17

MATERIAL MODELS

Nonlinear material model

In general, the nonlinear behavior is due to the dependence of the polarization P(t) on the applied electric field, E(t). Assuming an isotropic dispersive material, Maxwell's equations are:

H 0 ------ = E t

(15)

D = H -----t

(16)

D = P +P

NL

P
m=1

D m

(17)

P m + P m + 2 P L = G 2 E ---------m -------m m 0 0 m m 2 t t
2

(18)

where P represents the linear polarization, in general P = L 0 E, P m is the dispersive polarization which is controlled by Lorentz model in Equation 18 and denotes the nonlinear polarization. For more information, see Dispersive third-order nonlinear material on page 19.

18

MATERIAL MODELS

The nonlinear polarization P m may come from various model sources that produce the different nonlinear phenomenon. Currently OptiFDTD can handle four kinds of nonlinearity: Dispersive second-order nonlinear material Dispersive third-order nonlinear material Dispersive Kerr effect Dispersive Raman effect

NL

Dispersive second-order nonlinear material In this model, the electrical displacement D is

D = 0 L E + 0

(2)

: EE +

P
m=1

D m

(19)

where L is the linear relative permittivity and is the second order isotropic susceptibility. They are the real values. In order to simulate second order nonlinear effect, you should input two parameters: the linear relative permittivity L and the (2) second order isotropic susceptibility . Dispersive third-order nonlinear material Like the second-order nonlinearity, OptiFDTD takes third-order susceptibility to calculate the nonlinear polarizationn
M

(2)

D = 0 L E + 0

(3)

M EEE +

P
m=1

D m

(20)

where L is the linear relative permittivity and susceptibility. Dispersive Kerr effect

(3)

is the third order isotropic

If the time scale over which the medium changed is greater than the pulse width, we should take into account the effects of the finite response time of the medium. Followed by Prof. Richard W. Ziolkowski 's work [1]-[4], OptiFDTD treats the nonlinear effect with a finite response time as well as an instantaneous manner by

19

MATERIAL MODELS

solving the phenomenological susceptibility equation simultaneously with Maxwell's equation:

D = L 0 + P

NL

P
m=1

D m

(21)

NL

= 0 ( r, t, E )E

NL

(22)

NL 1 NL 1 2 ---------- + -- = -- 2 E - t

(23)

where

L 2
NL

is the linear relative permittivity is the nonlinear susceptibility is the response time is the Kerr model permittivity

Therefore, in order to simulate the Kerr effect, you should setup the three parameters, L , , and 2 . Due to the numerical difficulties to update the susceptibility in the FDTD scheme, currently OptiFDTD for Kerr model is good for high-nonlinearity. Dispersive Raman effect Raman model allows another way to simulate the nonlinear phenomenon where the nonlinear susceptibility was modeled by a second-order derivative equation which is related to the resonant wavelength and the response time

D = L 0 + P

NL

P
m=1

D m

(24)

20

MATERIAL MODELS

NL

= 0 E

NL

(25)

- + 2 - + 2 NL = 2 E 2 -----------R R ---------R R R 2 t t
2
NL

NL

(26)

where

L R R
NL

is the linear relative permittivity is the nonlinear susceptibility is the response time is Raman model permittivity is the Raman model resonant frequency

In order to simulate the Raman effect, set four parameters for Raman model: , and R .

L , R ,

Nonlinearity simulation To observe nonlinear effects in common used materials, a high-intensity light source is required. You should pay special attention to the input wave amplitude and/or the power level; each model with different parameters may need different input power or amplitude. If the input power is too low, you may not observe the nonlinear phenomenon. If the power is too strong, the nonlinear effect may be over saturable. The OptiFDTD takes Lorentz dispersive effect to the nonlinear effect. But it can work independently.

21

MATERIAL MODELS

Lorentz-Drude Model
Lorentz-Drude Model in Frequency Domain It has been shown [1] that a complex dielectric function for some metals and surface plasmas can be expressed in the following form:

r ( ) = r ( ) + r ( )

(1)

This form separates explicitly the intraband effects (usually referred to as free electron effects) from interband effect (usually referred to as bound-electron effects). The f intraband part r ( ) of the dielectric function is described by the well know freeelectron or Drude model [2][3]:

p f r ( ) = 1 + ----------------------- ; 2 j 0

(2)

The interband part of the dielectric function is described by the simple semiquantun model resembling the Lorentz results for insulators:

2 p ( ) = ------------------------------------- 2 2 m + j m
b r m=1

(3)

where p is the plasma frequency, m is the number of oscillators with frequency m and lifetime 1 m , where p = G m p is the plasma frequency as associated with intraband transitions with oscillator strength G 0 and damping constant 0 . The above Lorentz-Drude Model can be expressed as the more general equation:
M

r ( ) = r, +

m=0

Gm m ------------------------------------2 2 m + j m

(4)

where r, is the relative permittivity in the infinity frequency. m is the plasma frequency, m is the resonant frequency, and m is the damping factor or collision frequency. In this general equation, if only the term m = 0 exists, and 0 = 0 , then the general equation describes the Drude model as in (2). If only the m = 1...M term

22

MATERIAL MODELS

exists, and 1 = 2 = ...= M ; then the general model becomes the Lorentz model as in (3). This model can also work as the separate Drude and Lorentz models. Reference [1] also gives the LD parameters for 11 noble metals; their unit is in electron volts. Lorentz_Drude parameters for selected materials contains parameters compiled by Optiwave that describe noble metals. Lorentz-Drude Model in Time Domain The Lorentz-Drude model in (4) is in the frequency domain. However, FDTD is a time domain method and therefore would be suitable for broadband simulations. We need to transform (4) to time domain so that FDTD can handle the fullwave-analysis for the Lorentz-Drude material. This transformation to time domain is accomplished by using the Polarization philosophy within Maxwell's equation. The Lorentz-Drude model in time domain can be expressed:

H 0 ------ = E t

(5)

E r, 0 ------ + t

m=0

--------t

P m = H

(6)

2 P m 2 2 Pm ---------- + m -------- + m P m = 0 G m m E 2 t t

(7)

The FDTD algorithm can be derived based on the above equation.

23

MATERIAL MODELS

Lorentz-Drude model user interface in OptiFDTD The Lorentz-Drude model user interface is shown in Figure 22.
Figure 7 Lorentz-Drude material definition data entry interface

where: S = Strength of the corresponding resonance terms P (rad/s) = Plasma frequency R (rad/s) = Resonant frequency D (rad/s) = Collision frequency (or damping factor ) Note: Refer to the Technical Background description when you first start preparing metal simulations. The parameters of aluminum are located in Lorentz_Drude parameters for selected materials.

24

MATERIAL MODELS

References:
[1] Aleksandar D. Rakic, Aleksandra B. Djurisic, et. al., "Optical Properties of Metallic Films for Vertical - Cavity Optoelectronic Devices". 1998 Optical Society of America, August, Vol. 37, No. 22, Applied Optics, pp. 5271-5283. M. I. Markovic and A. D. Rakic, " Determination of reflection coefficients of laser light of wavelength ( 0.22m, 200m ) from the surface of aluminum using the Lorentz-Drude model", Appl. Opt. 29, 3479-3483 (1990). M. I. Markovic and A. D. Rakic, " Determination of optical properties of aluminum including electron reradiation in the Lorentz-Drude Model", Opt. Laser technol. 22, 394-398, (1990).

[2]

[3]

25

MATERIAL MODELS

Lorentz_Drude parameters for selected materials

Ag-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters
In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.8450 0.0650 0.1240 0.0110 0.8400 5.6460

Plasma Frequency
9.0100 9.0100 9.0100 9.0100 9.0100 9.0100

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.8160 4.4810 8.1850 9.0830 20.2900

Damping Frequency
0.0480 3.8860 0.4520 0.0650 0.9160 2.4190

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.8450 0.0650 0.1240 0.0110 0.8400 5.6460

Plasma Frequency
0.136884E+17 0.136884E+17 0.136884E+17 0.136884E+17 0.136884E+17 0.136884E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.123971E+16 0.680775E+16 0.124351E+17 0.137993E+17 0.308256E+17

Damping Frequency
0.729239E+14 0.590380E+16 0.686701E+15 0.987512E+14 0.139163E+16 0.367506E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.8450 0.0650 0.1240 0.0110 0.8400 5.6460

Plasma Frequency
0.1376 0.1376 0.1376 0.1376 0.1376 0.1376

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 1.5194 0.2767 0.1515 0.1365 0.0611

Damping Frequency

25.8304
0.3191 2.7430 19.0747 1.3536 0.5125

26

MATERIAL MODELS

Au-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.7600 0.0240 0.0100 0.0710 0.6010 4.3840

Plasma Frequency
9.0300 9.0300 9.0300 9.0300 9.0300 9.0300

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.4150 0.8300 2.9690 4.3040 3.3200

Damping Frequency
0.0530 0.2410 0.3450 0.8700 2.4940 2.2140

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.7600 0.0240 0.0100 0.0710 0.6010 4.3840

Plasma Frequency
0.137188E+17 0.137188E+17 0.137188E+17 0.137188E+17 0.137188E+17 0.137188E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.630488E+15 0.126098E+16 0.451065E+16 0.653885E+16 0.202364E+17

Damping Frequency
0.805202E+14 0.366139E+15 0.524141E+15 0.132175E+16 0.378901E+16 0.336362E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4 5

Strength
0.7600 0.0240 0.0100 0.0710 0.6010 4.3840

Plasma Frequency
0.1373 0.1373 0.1373 0.1373 0.1373 0.1373

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 2.9876 1.4938 0.4176 0.2881 0.0931

Damping Frequency
23.3935 5.1446 3.5938 1.4251 0.4971 0.5600

27

MATERIAL MODELS

Cu-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5750 0.0610 0.1040 0.7230 0.6380

Plasma Frequency
10.8300 10.8300 10.8300 10.8300 10.8300

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.2910 2.9570 5.3000 11.1800

Damping Frequency
0.0300 0.3780 1.0560 3.2130 4.3050

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5750 0.0610 0.1040 0.7230 0.6380

Plasma Frequency
0.164535E+17 0.164535E+17 0.164535E+17 0.164535E+17 0.164535E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.442101E+15 0.449242E+16 0.805202E+16 0.169852E+17

Damping Frequency
0.455775E+14 0.574276E+15 0.160433E+16 0.488135E+16 0.654037E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5750 0.0610 0.1040 0.7230 0.6380

Plasma Frequency
0.1145 0.1145 0.1145 0.1145 0.1145

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 4.2607 0.4193 0.2339 0.1109

Damping Frequency
41.3286 3.2800 1.1741 0.3859 0.2880

28

MATERIAL MODELS

Al-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5230 0.2270 0.0500 0.1660 0.0300

Plasma Frequency
14.9800 14.9800 14.9800 14.9800 14.9800

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.1620 1.5440 1.8080 3.4730

Damping Frequency
0.0470 0.3330 0.3120 1.3510 3.3820

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5230 0.2270 0.0500 0.1660 0.0300

Plasma Frequency
0.227583E+17 0.227583E+17 0.227583E+17 0.227583E+17 0.227583E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.246118E+15 0.234572E+16 0.274680E+16 0.527635E+16

Damping Frequency
0.714047E+14 0.505910E+15 0.474006E+15 0.205251E+16 0.513810E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.5230 0.2270 0.0500 0.1660 0.0300

Plasma Frequency
0.0828 0.0828 0.0828 0.0828 0.0828

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 7.6534 0.8030 0.6858 0.3570

Damping Frequency
26.3799 3.7233 3.9739 0.9177 0.3666

29

MATERIAL MODELS

Be-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0840 0.0310 0.1400 0.5300 0.1300

Plasma Frequency
18.5100 18.5100 18.5100 18.5100 18.5100

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.1000 1.0320 3.1830 4.6040

Damping Frequency
0.0350 0.6640 3.3950 4.4540 1.8020

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0840 0.0310 0.1400 0.5300 0.1300

Plasma Frequency
0.281213E+17 0.281213E+17 0.281213E+17 0.281213E+17 0.281213E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.151925E+15 0.156786E+16 0.483577E+16 0.699462E+16

Damping Frequency
0.531737E+14 0.100878E+16 0.515785E+16 0.676673E+16 0.273769E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0840 0.0310 0.1400 0.5300 0.1300

Plasma Frequency
0.0670 0.0670 0.0670 0.0670 0.0670

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 12.3986 1.2014 0.3895 0.2693

Damping Frequency
35.424 1.8673 0.3652 0.2784 0.6880

30

MATERIAL MODELS

Cr-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1680 0.1510 0.1500 1.1490 0.8250

Plasma Frequency
10.7500 10.7500 10.7500 10.7500 10.7500

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.1210 0.5430 1.9700 8.7750

Damping Frequency
0.0470 3.1750 1.3050 2.6760 1.3350

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1680 0.1510 0.1500 1.1490 0.8250

Plasma Frequency
0.163319E+17 0.163319E+17 0.163319E+17 0.163319E+17 0.163319E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.183829E+15 0.824952E+15 0.299292E+16 0.133314E+17

Damping Frequency
0.714047E+14 0.482362E+16 0.198262E+16 0.406551E+16 0.202820E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1680 0.1510 0.1500 1.1490 0.8250

Plasma Frequency
0.1153 0.1153 0.1153 0.1153 0.1153

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 10.2468 2.2833 0.6294 0.1413

Damping Frequency
26.3799 0.3905 0.9501 0.4633 0.9287

31

MATERIAL MODELS

Ni-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0960 0.1000 0.1350 0.1060 0.7290

Plasma Frequency
15.9200 15.9200 15.9200 15.9200 15.9200

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.1740 0.5820 1.5970 6.0890

Damping Frequency
0.0480 4.5110 1.3340 2.1780 6.2920

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0960 0.1000 0.1350 0.1060 0.7290

Plasma Frequency
0.241864E+17 0.241864E+17 0.241864E+17 0.241864E+17 0.241864E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.264349E+15 0.884203E+15 0.242624E+16 0.925071E+16

Damping Frequency
0.729239E+14 0.685333E+16 0.202668E+16 0.330892E+16 0.955911E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.0960 0.1000 0.1350 0.1060 0.7290

Plasma Frequency
0.0779 0.0779 0.0779 0.0779 0.0779

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 7.1256 2.1303 0.7764 0.2036

Damping Frequency
25.8304 0.2749 0.9294 0.5693 0.1971

32

MATERIAL MODELS

Pd-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.6490 0.1210 0.6380 0.4530

Plasma Frequency
9.7200 9.7200 9.7200 9.7200 9.7200

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.3360 0.5010 1.6590 5.7150

Damping Frequency
0.0080 2.9500 0.5550 4.6210 3.2360

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.6490 0.1210 0.6380 0.4530

Plasma Frequency
0.147671E+17 0.147671E+17 0.147671E+17 0.147671E+17 0.147671E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.510468E+15 0.761144E+15 0.252043E+16 0.868251E+16

Damping Frequency
0.121540E+14 0.448178E+16 0.843183E+15 0.702045E+16 0.491629E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.6490 0.1210 0.6380 0.4530

Plasma Frequency
0.1276 0.1276 0.1276 0.1276 0.1276

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 3.6901 2.4748 0.7474 0.2169

Damping Frequency
154.9821 0.4203 2.2340 0.2683 0.3831

33

MATERIAL MODELS

Pt-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.1910 0.6590 0.5470 3.5760

Plasma Frequency
9.5900 9.5900 9.5900 9.5900 9.5900

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.7800 1.3140 3.1410 9.2490

Damping Frequency
0.0800 0.5170 1.8380 3.6680 8.5170

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.1910 0.6590 0.5470 3.5760

Plasma Frequency
0.145696E+17 0.145696E+17 0.145696E+17 0.145696E+17 0.145696E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.118501E+16 0.199629E+16 0.477196E+16 0.140515E+17

Damping Frequency
0.121540E+15 0.785452E+15 0.279238E+16 0.557261E+16 0.129394E+17

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.3300 0.1910 0.6590 0.5470 3.5760

Plasma Frequency
0.1293 0.1293 0.1293 0.1293 0.1293

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 1.5896 0.9436 0.3947 0.1341

Damping Frequency
15.4982 2.3982 0.6746 0.3380 0.1456

34

MATERIAL MODELS

Ti-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1480 0.8990 0.3930 0.1870 0.0010

Plasma Frequency
7.2900 7.2900 7.2900 7.2900 7.2900

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 0.7770 1.5450 2.5090 19.4300

Damping Frequency
0.0820 2.2760 2.5180 1.6630 1.7620

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1480 0.8990 0.3930 0.1870 0.0010

Plasma Frequency
0.110753E+17 0.110753E+17 0.110753E+17 0.110753E+17 0.110753E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.118046E+16 0.234724E+16 0.381180E+16 0.295190E+17

Damping Frequency
0.124578E+15 0.345781E+16 0.382547E+16 0.252651E+16 0.267692E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.1480 0.8990 0.3930 0.1870 0.0010

Plasma Frequency
0.1701 0.1701 0.1701 0.1701 0.1701

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 1.5957 0.8025 0.4942 0.0638

Damping Frequency
15.1202 0.5448 0.4924 0.7456 0.7037

35

MATERIAL MODELS

W-Lorentz-Drude Model parameters

In Electron-Volts unit(eV)
Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.2060 0.0540 0.1660 0.7060 2.5900

Plasma Frequency
13.2200 13.2200 13.2200 13.2200 13.2200

Resonant Frequency
0.0000 1.0040 1.9170 3.5800 7.4980

Damping Frequency
0.0640 0.5300 1.2810 3.3320 5.8360

In Angle frequency Unit(Rad/s))

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.2060 0.0540 0.1660 0.7060 2.5900

Plasma Frequency
0.200845E+17 0.200845E+17 0.200845E+17 0.200845E+17 0.200845E+17

Resonant Frequency
0.000000E+00 0.152533E+16 0.291240E+16 0.543891E+16 0.113913E+17

Damping Frequency
0.972319E+14 0.805202E+15 0.194616E+16 0.506214E+16 0.886634E+16

In Wavelength Unit (m)

Term
0 1 2 3 4

Strength
0.2060 0.0540 0.1660 0.7060 2.5900

Plasma Frequency
0.0938 0.0938 0.0938 0.0938 0.0938

Resonant Frequency
Infinity 1.2349 0.6468 0.3463 0.1654

Damping Frequency
19.3728 2.3394 0.9679 0.3721 0.2124

36

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

OptiFDTD Boundary Conditions

PML Boundary Conditions
The basic FDTD algorithm must be modified at the boundaries of the computational window where suitable numerical absorbing boundary conditions (ABC) are applied. This is one of the most challenging parts of FDTD simulations. There are several choices for the type of boundary conditions. The Perfectly Matched Layer (PML) boundary conditions have the best performance. Our FDTD simulator uses the Anisotropic PML, or so-called Un-split PML (UPML) version. The theory of the UPML is very well explained in some of the references given here. The UPML boundary conditions are physical rather than numerical because their implementation is based on a Maxwellian formulation rather than on a mathematical model. Their absorbing properties are physically equivalent to the properties of an absorbing uni-axial anisotropic medium with the following permittivity and permeability tensors:

s = S, = S, S = 0 0 0

0 s 0

0 0 ,s = i ------- 0 s

(4)

A plane wave incident on a half space composed of the above uni-axial medium with an interface in the x = const plane is purely transmitted into it. The reflectionless property is completely independent of the angle of incidence, polarization and frequency of the incident wave. The numerical implementation of the UPML in a 2D (X-Z) computational window requires the introduction of such perfectly matched absorbing layers on all the sides. The corner regions need special attention. In these regions the tensor S from Equation 4 must be modifed to:

sx S = 0 0

0 sx 0

0 sz 0 0 sx 0

0 sz 0

0 x z 0 ,s x = x i -------- ,s z = z i ------- 0 0 1 sz

(5)

37

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

The minimization of the numerical reflectance of the Anisotropic PML layers requires spatial scaling of the conductivity profile from zero (at the interface of the PML) to a maximum value at the end of the computational window:

x ( x ) = max -- , L

x ( x ) = 1 + ( max 1 ) -- L

(6)

where L is the thickness of the Anisotropic PML. Typical values for the parameter m are between 2 and 4.

PMC/PEC boundary conditions and plane wave simulation

OptiFDTD now has options to use Perfect Electrical Conductor (PEC) and Perfect Magnetic Conductor (PMC) boundary conditions. You can choose which boundaries use the new conditions, and Anisotropic PML can be used for the remaining boundaries. With this PEC/PMC/Anisotropic PML combination, the following simulations may be obtained: Plane wave simulation Domain reduced simulation for symmetric, periodic, or photonic band gap structures

Image value of PEC/ PMC

The following graphs show the field set up in the PEC/PMC wall (zero thickness) and its image value
Figure 8 Field in PMC and image area

( E is the vertical electric component in the PMC wall, and magnetic component in the PMC wall.)

H // is the parallel

38

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

Figure 9 Field in PEC and image area

As we can see from Figure 8, PMC is a symmetric wall for the symmetric structure with symmetric wave propagation. The following two cases details the results when PMC occurs.
Figure 10 PMC wall in a symmetric waveguideexcited by symmetric TE waveguide mode

Figure 11 PMC wall in a periodic structure for TE plane wave propagation

39

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

PMC can be seen as the special case for Bloch's boundary condition (periodic boundary condition) where the k-vector is set to zero in the corresponding direction. PEC line is the complement of PMC, so in Figure 10, and Figure 11, the PMC line will become the PEC line if the wave polarization is changed to TM.

Plane wave realized in symmetric/periodic structure

Figure 12 shows how the plane wave simulation can be realized for a symmetric structure. For a 2D TE simulation, the edge of transverse plane should be set to the PMC boundary condition to realize the plane wave.
Figure 12 Plane wave in TE simulation

For a 2D TM simulation, the edge of transverse plane should set to the PEC boundary condition to realize the plane wave (see Figure 13).
Figure 13 Plane wave in TM simulation

For a 3D simulation, the plane wave realization depends on the wave polarization and the boundary condition setup at different edges of the transverse plane. If the wave goes in z-direction, and the input wave is in y-direction polarization, then the y plane (x-z) edge should be set to the PEC and x-plane (y-z plane) edge set to the PMC boundary (see Figure 14).

40

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

Figure 14 Y-polarization plane wave (z-direction propagation) with boundary conditions

For 3D simulation, if the wave goes in z-direction, and the input wave is in x-direction polarization, then the y plane (x-z) edge should be set to the PMC and x-plane (y-z plane) edge set to the PEC boundary (see Figure 15).
Figure 15 X-polarization plane wave (z-direction propagation) with boundary conditions

The plane wave shape can be set by setting the rectangular wave parameters in the Input Wave Properties dialog box. Currently, plane wave does not support the tilting angle. Currently, the plane wave simulation is only effective for symmetrical structures.

41

OPTIFDTD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

PBC Boundary Conditions

This version of OptiFDTD provides the option to use simplified Periodic Boundary Condition (PBC). PBC can work with other boundary conditions such as Anisotropic PML, PMC, and PEC. With PBC, you can generate a simple plane wave simulation or periodic layout simulations. The simplified PBC is based on the Bloch's Theorem: For the periodic layout, the wave function is written as the combination of a cell periodic component and a wave-like component:

( + ) = ( ) exp ( jk )
The equation above needs to have a pre-defined value for the k-vector; which is not so feasible for an FDTD simulation, especially for Pulse input.

Therefore, we simplified the application by setting the k-vector in one specific direction as zero, which then leads to the input wave being the axis-propagated wave, and then the equation becomes:

( + ) = ( )
In an OptiFDTD application, in the simplified is the periodic length or one dimensional length the edge of which is set to periodic boundary condition.

( ) is the field component at the edge of the simulation domain.

the

( + ) is the corresponding field value at the boundary of the opposite edge of () .

The following graph shows the relationship.

42

INPUT WAVE

Input Wave
Incident wave source excitation Total/Reflected field formulation
The FDTD numerical scheme yields the solution of an initial value problem. At the first time step of the simulation all the fields are set to zero. The algorithm needs the initial field excitation that will be propagated through the computational domain. The FDTD Total/Reflected Field formulation gives the methodology in defining a +Z propagating incident field. The computational domain is separated into two sub-regions the total field region and the reflected field region. The plane separating these regions is called the incident field (Figure 16). In the Total Field Region, the waveguide structures of interest are designed. The interaction between the incident field and the waveguide structure will take place in this region. That is why the Total Field Region contains information for both the incident and scattered (reflected) waves. In the Reflected Field Region the geometry is uniform and the propagating waves are presented by the fields reflected from the Total Field Region. There are no objects in this region and the signal will not be reflected back to the total field region.
Figure 16 Total/Reflected field formulation

CW or pulsed excitations can be used. One can consider the incident field as being generated by a flashlight located on the incidence plane facing the +Z direction. Before starting the simulation the flashlight is turned off and the field values in the

43

INPUT WAVE

whole computational domain are equal to zero. The flashlight is switched on at t = 0 and illuminates only the Total Field Region. If the excitation scheme is perfect, there should not be any light detected by an observer located in the Reflected Field Region, unless there are some obstacles which would generate the reflections. The incident wave can be generated by specifying the exact field distribution on the incident plane at each time interval.

CW excitation
In CW excitation, the time dependence of the incident field is a single frequency sinusoidal function. For example the incident Ey field has the following form:

E y ( x, z inc ) = AF ( x, z inc ) sin ( t + i )

where A is the field amplitude, incident plane location z inc .

inc

(7)

AF ( x, z inc ) is the transverse field distribution at the

The initial phase offset i is the phase difference between points in the incidence plane. This offset can be adjusted to define the direction of the incident field. = ( 2 )c is the frequency of the input wave. In the CW case the optical wave analog propagates until it reaches the stationary state everywhere in the computational window.

Pulsed excitation
For pulsed excitations the incident field has the form:

E y ( x ,z inc ) = AT ( t )F ( x ,z inc ) sin ( t + i )

where

inc

(8)

1 t t off T ( t ) = exp -- ------------- 2 t0

is the pulse envelope function, parameter.

(9)

t off is the time offset and t 0 is the pulse width

For pulsed excitations the time stepping continues until the desired late-time pulse response is observed at the field points of interest.

Point Source
This version of OptiFDTD includes a new type of excitation - Point Source. Point source can also be referred to as a radiation source. For this new source, the input

44

INPUT WAVE

wave is only functional with one field component at one single point. You can specify which field component is required to add this source. In the case of CW, the point source is expressed as:

F i, j, k = F i, j, k + A exp ( t T ) sin ( t )
where (i,j,k) is the user-specified position and F is the user specified component, A is the point source amplitude, T is the time delay and w is the angle frequency. F i, j, k represents the FDTD simulation results, and the last term in the equation is the enforced point source excitation. For the GMCW, point source is expressed as
2 2 F i, j, k = F i, j, k + A exp ( 0.5 ( t t 0 ) T ) sin ( t )

where

t 0 is time offset and T is the half width.

Point sources can work with other kinds of source (such as input plane source). Point sources can be either continuous wave (CW) or Gaussian modulated continuous wave (GMCW). Point sources works for both 2D and 3D simulations. Multiple point sources can be utilized in OptiFDTD. When Point source is used as the key input. The normalized power calculation will be disabled in analyzer

Note:

Gaussian Beam Size

In OptiFDTD, transverse Gaussian Beam is expressed as

( x x0 ) 2 E ( x ) = A exp -----------------2T 2
where

x 0 is the center position and T is being called as half width.

In general, Gaussian Beam radius is the radius at which the field amplitude and intensity drop to 1/e and 1 e 2 , respectively. Gaussian Beam Size or Gaussian Beam Spot size is the beam diameter which is two times of Beam Radius. Suppose the beam size is denoted as a, which means

45

INPUT WAVE

a a2 = exp ( 1 ) = exp ----- E x = -- 8T 2 x 0 = 0

This means

a T = --------2 2
Please use the above formula to set the half width in OptiFDTD for your desired Gaussian Beam size.

2D Total Field /Scattering Field (TF/SF) region.

The Total-field/Scattered-field (TF/SF) technique results from attempts to realize any tilting plan-wave source that avoids the difficulties caused by using either the hard source or the boundary conditions. 2D TF/SF is a special type of formula that generates a wave in the enclosed rectangular surface. Inside the rectangular region, it generates the total field (including incident wave and scattering wave together). Outside of this rectangular region, it generates the pure scattering field or reflected field. Figure 17 shows a 2D sketch for 2D TF/SF. TF/SF used special numerical formula to separate the total field and scattering field. A 2D free space TF/SF response is shown in Figure 18

46

INPUT WAVE

Figure 17 TF/ST Sketch

Figure 18 Field response for a TF/SF sketch

In OptiFDTD, it is the users choice to set up the total field working area position, size and the scattering field detector position. After the simulation, the steady state scattering field response can be obtained in the scattering field detector. If all four scattering- field detector lines are active, Radar Cross Section (RCS) can also be performed based on the near scattering field response, RCS calculation formula is listed in the post-simulation data analysis section.

47

2D FDTD BAND SOLVER

2D FDTD Band Solver

The band solver in OptiFDTD is an integrated CAD tool and simulation engine for analyzing the photonic crystal and photonic band gap structure. Currently it employs the FDTD method and generates band-diagrams.

Simulation concept introduction

As we know, the periodic structure or the lattice structure has the mode selection function. The task of the band solver is to find these mode positions based on one or several basic lattice cell. The key points for FDTD simulation come from: How can the FDTD method extract the mode? How can the FDTD method handle several basic cells and generate global results?

The first question can be addressed in two parts: set the reasonable initial fields that can excite out all necessary modes get the eigenvalues (frequencies) from the Fourier spectrum of the field time sequence somewhere in the periodic cell.The second question can be solved by using the Bloch's boundary condition with defined k-vector.

In summary, when a field pattern is excited in the first time step, the steady state oscillating mode which will satisfy the Bloch's boundary condition will be found through FDTD simulation in the defined periodic cell. Note: To extract all the excited eignevalues, observation points to record the time domain series are needed. Some of the mode may not be excited. Because of the above points, the FDTD band solver cannot be guaranteed to find all the eigenvalues.

48

2D FDTD BAND SOLVER

Basic equation for TE mode 2D simulation

E H 0 --------x = -------y z t E H 0 --------z = -------y t x H x HE -------y + E y = --------- --------z x t z

Basic equation for TM mode 2D simulation

a b c
(10)

E EH 0 --------y = -------z -------x z t x H E -------x + E x = --------y z t H E 0 -------z + E z = --------y x t

a b c
(11)

Note: The above equations are same as the equations used in conventional FDTD simulations. However, because the Bloch's boundary condition is used in the simulation, all the field components in band solving are complex values. The discretization treatment for the FDTD method and simulation domain is same as conventional FDTD simulation.

Bloch's boundary condition

Bloch's theorem tells us that for periodic structure, field components have the following properties:

( r + R, t ) = ( r, t )e

jk r

(12)

where R is the lattice vector, k is the wave vector. Equation 12 is the boundary condition used in the OptiFDTD band solver.

49

2D FDTD BAND SOLVER

Initial excitation
Unlike conventional FDTD simulations where time domain excitation is continuous wave and lasts on only some time steps, the FDTD band solver sets the initial value in the first time step, and this initial field is expected to have non-zero projection on the normal modes we are interested in. Example: At

t = 0:

E( r) = 0

(13)

H(r) =

h ( k + G )e
0
G

k ( k + G )r

(14)

h0 ( k + G ) = v ( k + G ) v is chosen as the unit vector along the Cartesian system coordinator.

This keeps

(15)

H = 0 .

50

2D FDTD BAND SOLVER

Figure 19 Flow chart of FDTD band solver

Note: In OptiFDTD 5.0, the FDTD band solver only deals with the 2D square lattice and 2D hexagonal lattice. In OptiFDTD 5.0, the band solver only accept lossless Isotropic and Anisotropic materials.

Unit cell and Brillouin zone

The following figures show the unit cell and Brillouin zone in the OptiFDTD 2D FDTD band solver.

51

2D FDTD BAND SOLVER

Figure 20 Unit cell and associated Brillouin zone for square lattice

Figure 21 Unit cell and Brillouin zone for Hexagonal lattice

References:
[1] [2] J. B. Pendry, "Calculating photonic band structure", J. Phys., No. 8, 1085-1108, 1996. A. J. Ward, J.B. Pendry, " Calculating photonic Green's functions using a non-orthogonal finite difference time-domain method", PACS.

52

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

Post-simulation Data Analysis

OptiFDTD provides comprehensive post-simulation data analysis tools in the Simulator and Analyzer.

Discretized Fourier Transform (DFT) and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

As a time domain simulation method; FDTD can get all the relevant spectral response with a single simulation. To get the spectral response, you need to use the DFT, FFT, and Analysis. Discretized Fourier Transform gets a single wavelength response from a time series. 1.33

S () = s (t )e jt dt = s (n)e jnt t
T 0 n =0

where s(n) are the time domain response, N is the number of time steps, and the angle frequency.

is

When DFT is running in the simulator, it will get the frequency domain response only for the center wavelength, while DFT for the observation point, area, and line gives the spectral response for a series of wavelengths which are identified by the user. Fast Fourier Transform uses the traditional fast Fourier transform scheme to get a spectral response from the zero frequency to the cutoff frequency 1 ( 2Dt ) ; and the frequency domain sampling step is 1 ( 2NDt ) . In general, the sampling frequency step for FFT is comparable to the wavelength due to the fact that the FDTD required time step is very small. Therefore, the FFT results may have a larger error than that of the DFT results, but the FFT method is much faster than DFT.

Power calculation and Poynting vector

For the z-direction propagation wave. The total power in x-y plan can be divided into two power values: x-direction polarized z-direction propagation power (Pz-x) and ydirection polarized z-direction propagation power (Pz-y). The corresponding formulas are:

x-polarization power

Pz x = Re(

1 & * E x H y dxdy ) 2 s

1.34a

53

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

y-polarixation power

Pz y = Re(

1 & * E y H x dxdy ) 2 s

1.34b

Total power

Pz = Pz x + Pz y = Re(

1 & * 1 & * E x H y dxdy) Re( 2 E y H x dxdy) 1.34c 2 s s

where the cap dot indicates the complex value that comes from the DFT calculation, and the superscript star indicates the complex conjugate value. The z-direction Poynting for a point (i,j,) in x-y plane is:

S z ,i , j =

1 & 1 & * E x , i , j H * ,i , j E y , i , j H x ,i , j y 2 2

1.35

The Poynting vector is a complex value. In OptiFDTD, only the amplitudes are displayed to the user.

Overlap Integral (OI)

Overlap Integral do the inner product and integral calculation for the two electric fields in a specified region. The results can also be seen as the Correlation Function, or as a comparison between the two fields. The Overlap Integral (MOI) is defined as:

OI =

v v & E1 ( x, y ) E * 2 ( x, y )dxdy
s

2 2 v v & & E1 ( x, y ) dxdy E 2 ( x, y ) dxdy 1.36 s s

The cap dot represents the complex value, and the superscript star represents the conjugate value, E 1 is the first field component, and E 2 is the second field component.

Mode Overlap Integral (MOI)

For mode overlap integral calculation, the first component in eq.1.36 are the OptiFDTD simulated DFT results in a selected x-y plane, and the second components are the modal components that come from the mode solver for the same x-y plane.

Input Overlap Integral (IOI)

For Input Overlap Integral, the first component E 1 in Equation 1.36 are the OptiFDTD simulated DFT results in a selected x-y plane, and the second component E 2 is the input wave in the input plane. The input overlap integral is also called the power overlap integral. The input overlap integral provides the criteria to do the comparison between the output in the selected plane and the input wave.

54

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

Input Overlap Integral Scan (IOIS)

The Input Overlap Integral Scan makes the Input Overlap Integral calculations for all the x-y slices in the z-direction. This means that it scans the IOI calculation in the zdirection, and the results are provided to the user interface. Users can observe percentages of output power in each slice.Far Field Transform.

Far Field Transform

Fraunhofer approximation
Narrow angle far-field transform being used in OptiFDTD is based on the Fraunhofer approximation [1]:
(1)

ie ikd e 2d E ( x, y, z = d ) --------------------------d

ki ----- ( x 2 + y2 )

d E ( x , y , 0 )e i

k -- ( xx + yy ) -

dx dy

At a large distance d, the far field position can be expressed by the far field angle,
(2)

x y tan ( x ) = -- ; tan ( y ) = -d d
Where the x-directional angle ( x ) is the angle between the original yz-plane and the shortest straight line connecting the point and the Y axix, and y-directional angle ( y ) is the angle between the orginal xz-plane and the shortest straight line connecting the point and the x axis. The far field angle is also shown in the Figure 20. Associated with the angle where to observe the far-field, far-field formula now can be simplified as
(3)

E ( x, y )

E ( x, y, 0 )e

2 in ----- [ x tan ( ) + y tan ( ) ] x y

dx dy

Please note that the above formula assumes that the far-field plane is far away from the near field one. OptiFDTD uses equation (3) to calculate the narrow angle far field transform.

55

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

Figure 22

Far-field angle (the red region is the near field)

Fresnel-Kirchhoff Diffraction Formula

Wide angle far field transform is based on the Fresnel-Kirchhoff diffraction formula [1].
(3)

i E ( x, y, z = d ) = -

e ikR 1 + cos ( R, z ) E ( x, y, z = 0 ) ------ ------------------------------- dxdy R 2

Where R is the vector from near-field to far-field. The far-field position can be expressed with far field angle the far-field distance z=d. So in the wide angle far field transform, the user needs to specify the far-field distance.

56

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

Heating Absorption
It is known that the real electromagnetic power transmitted through the closed surface S into the volume V is equal to the power loss produced by conduction current resulting in Joule heating plus the power loss resulting from polarization damping forces. From the complex Poyntin vector theorem, the time-average heating absorption intensity is expressed as

w() = () E() 2 2
where is the conductivity that maybe varied with wavelenth, E is the electrical field components. In OptiFDTD, for each cell in a given observation area, the heating absorption intensity for each polarization then can be expressed as

w x, i, i ( ) = x, i, j ( ) E x, i, j ( ) 2 2 w y, i, j ( ) = y, i, j ( ) E y, i, j ( ) 2 2 w z, i, j ( ) = z, i, j ( ) E z, i, j ( ) 2 2 w i, j ( ) = w x, i, j ( ) + w y, i, j ( ) + w z, i, j ( )
where the subscript letter, x,y and z means the polarization direction, i and j is the position index. Then the total heating absorption for one observation slice will be the integral of the heating absorption intensity in the volume

Wx ( ) = Wy ( ) = Wz ( ) =

w
obs

x, m, n

( ) du dv d = ( ) du dv d =

obs

x, i, j

d ( ) E x, i, j ( ) 2 du dv ---- 2 d ( ) E y, i, j ( ) 2 du dv ---- 2

w
obs

y, m, n

obs

y, i, j

obs

w z, m, n ( ) du dv d =

obs

d z, i, j ( ) E z, i, j ( ) 2 du dv ---- 2

57

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

Where du and dv are the mesh size in the observation plane, d is the third dimensional (vertical to the observation area) space step. The total heating absorptionin the whole observation slice will be

W ( ) = Wx ( ) + Wy ( ) + Wz ( )
Heating absorption calculation needs the conductivity. Basic formula between permittivity and refractive index is

r j ------- = ( n jK ) 2 w 0
So the permittivity and conductivity is

r = n2 K2 = 2nK 0
For Lorentz_Drude model material
M 2 Gm m ------------------------------------ = r1 ( ) j r2 ( ) = r j -------2 2 0 m + j m

r, +

m=0

The conductivity can be delivered as

= 0 r2 ( ) RCS Calculation
Consider figure 21, which depicts an obeservation point P = r in the far field many wavelengths away from the near field path r' = z'z + x'x . In this case, the Far Field can be idetified as:

j 4 jkr e E y ( r' ) = --------------- e 8kr

( 0 )y' J ea ( r' ) ky'xJ ( r' ) r ma Ca

+jkr r'dC' e

(RCS-1)

58

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

for TE simulation and

j 4 jkr e H y [ r ( ) ] = --------------- e 8kr

( y M eq ) +k ( y J eq ) r Ca

+jkr r'dC' e

(RCS-2)

for TM simulation. Then the bistatic radar cross section (RCS) in two dimension can be defined as:

Power scattered per unit angle in direction r 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Incident Power per unit length RCS ( ) = F() = 2 -------------------2 F inc
2

(RCS-3)

Figure 23 Geometry of far-field point relative to the new field contour

59

POST-SIMULATION DATA ANALYSIS

References:
[1] Justin Peatross and Harold Stokes, Physics of Light and Optics

60

PLANE WAVE EXPANSION (PWE) METHOD

Plane Wave Expansion (PWE) method

The Maxwell equation in a transparent, time-invariant, source free, and non-magnetic medium can be written in the following form:

1 --------- H ( r ) = ----- H ( r ) , 2 c (r)

(1)

where ( r ) is the space dependent dielectric function, c is speed of light in vacuum, and H ( r ) is the optical magnetic field vector of a definite frequency with time it dependence e . This equation is sometimes called the master equation [1], and represents a Hermitian eigen-problem, which would not be applicable if the wave equation were derived in terms of the electric field. The Bloch theorem says that, due to the infinite periodicity, the magnetic field will take the form:

H ( r ) = e hk ( r ) ,
where h ( r ) = h ( r + R ) for all combinations of lattice vectors with the master equation in operator form:

ikr

(2)

R . Thus, we end up

2 1 ( + ik ) --------- ( + ik ) h k = ----- h k 2 c (r)

(3)

This is the fundamental equation, which needs to be solved. The equation is transformed into a finite problem by expanding the magnetic field in a finite basis of simple plane waves. Different approaches can be explored to solve the final discretized problem, e.g. [2] and [3]. The result of solving the discretized problem is the dispersion relationship between the frequencies of the modes and wave vector k , usually plotted in the form of a band diagram.

61

PLANE WAVE EXPANSION (PWE) METHOD

References:
[1] [2] [3] J.D. Joannopoulos, R.D. Meade, and J.N. Winn, "Photonic crystals, Molding the flow of light, Princeton University Press, 1995. S.G. Johnson, J.D. Joannopoulos, Block-iterative frequency-domain methods for Maxwell's equations in a planewave basis", Optics Express 8, no.3, p.173-190, 2000. S.Guo, S.Albin, "Simple plane wave implementation for photonic crystal calculations", Optics Express 11, no.2, p.167-175, 2003.

62

POWER TRANSMITTANCE CALCULATION WITH VB SCRIPTING

Power Transmittance Calculation with VB Scripting

Access to the simulation results data of Observation objects is a critical feature required for layout sweep simulations and optimization of designed devices. During the simulations, observation objects collect time domain data. The time domain data are stored in the Analyzer file. The OptiFDTD Analyzer provides all tools necessary for post-simulation analysis of the results. However, this requires manual interaction with the application. In order to provide the means for automated processing of the simulation results, VB Script interfaces have been designed, which access the required data. For more information, see Power Transmittance Calculations Observation Line of the VB Script Reference Guide for a description and usage details for the VB script functions and interface.

63

POWER TRANSMITTANCE CALCULATION WITH VB SCRIPTING

References: FDTD basic references

[1] [2] [3] Yee, K. S., "Numerical solution of initial boundary value problems involving Maxwell's equations in isotropic media," IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation, 302-307, (1966). Chu, S. T., Chaudhuri, S.K., "A finite-difference time-domain method for the design and analysis of guided-wave optical structures," Journal of Lightwave Technology, 2033-2038, (1989). Taflove, A., Hagness, S., "Computational Electrodynamics: The Finite-Difference Time-Domain Method," Second edition, Arthech House, Boston, (2000).

Material models
[1] Ziolkowski, R. W., "Incorporation of microscopic material models into FDTD approach for ultrafast optical propagation," IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation, 375-391, (1997). Liang, T., Ziolkowski, R. W., "Dispersion effects on grating-assisted output couplers under ultrafast pulse excitations", Microwave and Opt. Tech. Lett., 17, 17-23, (1998).

[2]

Anisotropic Perfectly Matched Layer (Anisotropic PML) boundary conditions

[1] [2] [3] Brenger, J. P., "A perfectly matched layer for the absorption of electromagnetic waves," Journal of Computational Physics, 114, 185-200, (1994). Gedney, S. D., "An anisotropic perfectly matched layer absorbing media for the truncation of FDTD lattices," IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation, 1630-1639, (1996). Taflove, A., "Advances in Computational ElectrodynamicsThe Finite-Difference TimeDomain Method", Artech House, Boston, Ch. 5, (1998).

Nonlinearity
[1] Ziolkowski, Richard W., Judkins, Justin B., "Full-wave vector Maxwell equation modeling of the self-focusing of ultrashort optical pulses in a nonlinear Kerr medium exhibiting a finite response time", J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, 2, 186-198 (1993). Ziolkowski, Richard W., Judkins, Justin B., "Nonlinear finite-difference time-domain modeling of linear and nonlinear corrugate waveguides", J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, 9, 1565-1575, (1994). Ziolkowski, Richard W., Judkins, Justin B., "Applications of the nonlinear fainted difference time-domain(NL-FDTD) method to pulse propagation in nonlinear media: self-focusing and linear-nonlinear interfaces", Radio Science, 901-911, (1993). Ziolkowski, Richard W., "The incorporation of microscopic material models into the FDTD approach for ultrafast optical pulse simulations", IEEE Trans. On Antenna and Propagation, 3, 375-391, (1997). Joseph, Rose M., Taflove, Allen, "FDTD Maxwell's equations models for nonlinear electrodynamics and optic", IEEE Trans. On Antenna and Propagation, 3, 364-374, (1997).

[2] [3]

[4]

[5]

64

POWER TRANSMITTANCE CALCULATION WITH VB SCRIPTING

[6]

Goorjian, Peter M., Taflove, Allen, Joseph, Rose M., "Computational modeling of Femtosecond optical soliton from Maxwell's equation", IEEE Journal of Quantum electronics, 10, 2416-2422, (1992). Joseph, Rose M., Taflove, Allen, " Spatial soliton deflection mechanism indicated by FD-TD Maxwell's equations modeling", IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, 10, 1251-1254, (1994).

[7]

65

POWER TRANSMITTANCE CALCULATION WITH VB SCRIPTING

66

Tutorials
This section contains the following tutorials. Introduction to the layout designer concept Lesson 1Getting started Lesson 2Input wave setup Lesson 3Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation Lesson 4Multiple resonant Lorentz dispersive material simulation Lesson 5Drude model for noble metal and surface plasma simulation Lesson 62nd-Order nonlinearity simulation Lesson 7Four wave mixing Lesson 8Plane wave simulation Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver

NOTE: For further lessons, see electronic version of Technical Background and Tutorials provided in the Documentation section of the installed software.

67

TUTORIALS

Notes:

68

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Introduction to the layout designer concept

This lesson is designed to familiarize you with the OptiFDTD layout designer concept. The same basic steps need to be followed to layout any device in OptiFDTD. This document will guide you through these steps and provide you with a detailed explanation.

OptiFDTD comes as 4 main applications:

1. Layout Designer This is where you define your structure and simulation conditions. 2. Profile Designer This is used to define the materials and profiles used in the simulation. 3. Simulator This program loads the designer file and performs the simulation. The simulator is started from the layout designer. 4. Analyzer This program is used to view the results and perform some post processing. As soon as the simulation is done, the simulator will ask if you would like to open the analyzer.

This document focuses on using the layout designer. To start an OptiFDTD project, your first step will be to open up the layout designer. From here the process of defining a layout begins.

Figure 1 is a flow chart that illustrates the main steps for building a layout.

69

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 1 Flow chart for building a Layout

The simulation domain can be 2D (finite xz-area) or 3D (xyz-volume) depending on the simulation that you choose. For 3D simulations, the domain is divided into 2 parts called substrate and cladding for historical reasons. The boundary between substrate and cladding define y = 0. Structures such as waveguides and lenses are placed within this domain. An example layout to illuminate the design concept is illustrated in Figure 2. We can see the substrate is the volume defined by y < 0 and the cladding is the volume defined by y > 0. The substrate and cladding each have a material associated with them. They define the default background material that other structures are imbedded in. There is a channel waveguide consisting of two rectangular layers; it is suspended in the cladding volume and extends along the zdirection. Another fiber waveguide consisting of two circular fiber layers is imbedded in the substrate and also extends along z-direction. The cross-sections of the rectangular waveguide and the fiber are what we call profiles. By combining profiles with waveguide that are drawn in the layout, we can define 3D shapes in the simulation domain.

70

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

The following is the relevant data for this layout 1)Material that will be used in the project a. b. c. d. e. f. Substrate material: n=2.0 Cladding material: n=1.0 (Air) Material for channel waveguide layer 1: n=3.0 Material for channel waveguide layer 2: n=2.5 Material for fiber waveguide core layer: n=3.0 ( same as channel waveguide layer 1) Material for fiber waveguide cladding layer: n=2.5 ( same as channel waveguide layer 2)

2)Waveguide profile (waveguide cross section) and material a) Channel profile Layer 1: width: 1.5m; thickness: 1.0m; Material: n=3.0 Layer 2: width: 1.0m; thickness: 0.5m; Material: n=2.5 b) Fiber profile Core layer: radius: 0.5m ; Material: n=3.0 Cladding layer: radius: 1.0m; Material: n=2.5 3)Simulation domain properties. a) Length: 8m (z-direction: 0m +8m); b) Width : 6m (x-direction: -3m +3m) c) Substrate layer thickness: 3m (y-direction: -3m 0 m), material: n=2.0 d) Cladding thickness: 3um (y-direction: 0 m 3m), material: n=1.0 (Air) 4)Waveguide properties a) Channel waveguide Position: (1.5, 1.0, 0) m (1.5, 1.0, 8) m Width: 1.5 m; Thickness: 1.5 m b) Fiber waveguide Position: (-1.5, 1.5, 0) m (1.5, -1.5, 8) m Width: 2.0 m

71

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 2 Example Layout

The following detailed steps are used to build the project layout demonstrated in Figure 2. Step Action

Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs >Optiwave Software > OptiFDTD > Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens (see Figure 3)

72

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 3

OptiFDTD Designer (No layout)

Create a new project From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. (See Figure 4)

73

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 4 Initial Properties

Start Profile Designer To define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project, Click Profiles and Materials button in Initial Properties Dialog. The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens. (See Figure 5)

74

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 5 Profile designer

Note: (1)Profile Designer can work independently. It can be started from the start menu of OptiFDTD, or started in the layout designer. (2)Material and waveguide profile defined in the Master folder can be worked as database

Define material in Profile Designer Perform the following sub-steps to define the material that will be used in the example project. (1) In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder. A context menu appears (see Figure 6).

75

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 6 Context Menu

(2) Select New. The FDTD-Dielectric dialog box appears (see Figure 7).

Figure 7 FDTD-Dielectric dialog box

(3) Type the following information Name: n=2.0 Constant refractive index (isotropic)(Re): 2.0 (4) To save the material, click Store. Material n=2.0 will be listed in the FDTDDielectric folder. (5) Repeat above sub steps (1) - (4) to define second material as Name: n=2.5 Constant refractive index (isotropic)(Re): 2.5 (6) Repeat above sub steps (1) - (4) to define third material as Name: n=3.0 Constant refractive index (isotropic)(Re): 3.0

76

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

(7) Air material is the OptiFDTD default material that will be always exist in the material folder. If Air material does not appear in the material folder list, please follow the step (1) - (4) to define this Air material: Name: Air Constant refractive index (isotropic)(Re): 1.0

Explain:

(1) Right Click on the defined material in the Material folder list, A context menu appears. you can copy, remove, Edit, rename and check properties of this material by select the corresponding item. (2) You can also select one defined material from the material folder list and drag it into corresponding other material folder in Master folder or other project folder (when you open more projects)

Define Channel profile Channel profile is a waveguide cross section that may contain single or multiple rectangular shapes. (1) In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. (2) Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears (see Figure 8).

77

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 8 Channel Profile dialog box

(a) (3) Type the following Profile name: ChannelPro1. (4) To define the 2D profile, in the Material list under 2D profile definition, select N=3.0. Explain: (a)2D Profile will be used as 2D simulation. (b)Only the material is needed for the 2D profile definition. The 2D waveguide shape will be defined in the layout window (5) To define the 3D channel profile, under 3D profile definition: (a)Type the following information (refer to Figure 7): Layer name: Layer1

78

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Width: 1.5 Thickness: 1.0 Offset: 0. (b)In the Material list, select n=3.0 (c)Click Add. (d)Repeat above step (a)-(c) to add another layer that has the following properties. Layer name: Layer2 Width: 1.0 Thickness: 0.5 Offset: 0. (e)To save the defined channel profile, click Store, ChannelPro1 will be listed under the Channel profile folder. Note: (a) Now we have created a waveguide cross section as shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9 Two layer channel profile

(b) Each layers dimension is a ratio value. The waveguide real dimension will be set in the waveguide properties dialog box in the layout window.

(c) Offset can make the layers shift along the horizontal direction.

79

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Define fiber profile Fiber profile is a waveguide cross section that may contain single or multiple circular or elliptical shapes. (1) In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Fiber folder. A context menu appears. (2) Select New. The Fiber Profile dialog box appears (see Figure 10). (3) Type the following Profile name: FiberPro1. (4) To define the 2D fiber profile, in the Material list under 2D profile definition, select N=3.0. (5) To define the 3D fiber profile, under 3D profile definition: (a)Type the following information (refer to Figure 11): Layer name: Core Rx: 0.5(x-directional radius) Ry: 0.5(y-directional radius) (b)In the Material list, select n=3.0 (c)Click Add. (d)Repeat above step (a)-(c) to add another layer that has the following properties. Layer name: Cladding Rx: 1.0 Ry: 1.0 Material: n=2.5 (e)To save the defined channel profile, click Store, FiberPro1 will

be listed under the Fiber Profile folder.

80

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 10 Two layers fiber profile

Note:

(a) Now we have created a fiber waveguide cross section as shown in Figure 11.

81

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 11 Sketch for Two Layers fiber profile

(b) The Input dimension is a ratio value. The real fiber waveguide dimension can be re-set in the layout window. The material and waveguide cross-section have now been defined. We can either leave the Profile designer window open or close it. In the next step we return to the initial properties dialog box to finish the layout dimension setting.

Set initial simulation domain properties (1) In the Initial Properties dialog Box, click Waveguide Properties button. (a) In the Width input box, input the initial waveguide width as 1.5m

Explain: This is the waveguide width default setting, i.e. when you draw a waveguide in the layout window; the drawn waveguide will has this default width.

(b) From the Profile list, Select ChannelPro1 as the default waveguide profile

Note: When you draw a waveguide direction, this channel profile will be linked to your drawn waveguide

(2) In the Initial Properties dialog box, click Wafer Dimension button.

82

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

(a) Input 8.0 (m) in the Length input box (b) Input 6.0 (m) in the Width input box

Note: (a) In OptiFDTD, we refer to the whole simulation domain as the wafer (b) Length direction is designated as z-direction. And the z-directional coordination for the layout will be from 0 m to 8 m for the current setting (c) Width direction is designated as x-direction. And the x-directional coordination for the layout will be from -3 m to 3 m for the current setting (3) In the Initial Properties dialog box , Click 3D Wafer Properties (a) In the Substrate area, input the following information Material: n=2; thickness: 3 (m) (b) In the Substrate area, input the following information Material: Air; thickness: 3 (m)

Explain: (1) 3D Wafer Properties control the y direction simulation domain properties. By default, Optiwave automatically set the wafer has two layers in y-direction. One layer is named Substrate, and another layer is named Cladding. Here the word Substrate and Cladding may not be your real layouts substrate and cladding. (2) Interface between substrate and cladding layer will be the y-directional original point. The Substrate thickness can be set as zero to make the whole simulation domain as one background material, later in the layout window, user can fill in other waveguide shape with different materials. (3) For the current setting, the y-direction coordination for the layout will be from -3 m to +3um. i.e, from -3 m to 0 um, it is the substrate layer with material as n=2, and from 0 um to 3 m, it is the cladding layer. (4) In the Initial Properties dialog box , Click 2D Wafer Properties. In the Wafer Refractive Index region set, the material as Air

Explain: This step will be set the back ground material for 2D layout.

83

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

The initial properties settings have now been completed. The user can always modify these settings by selecting Wafer Properties or Profile and Material in the edit menu of the OptiFDTD Designer.

Start OptiFDTD Designer window Click OK in the Initial Properties Dialog box, OptiFDTD Designer appears (see Figure 12).

Figure 12 OptiFDTD layout Designer

Explain (1) OptiFDTD Designer window is the xz- plane viewer of your layout. (2) For the first time user, we recommend that all the shortcut toolbars are visible. Also for your convenience the waveguide shape shortcut toolbar can be moved to the left side of the layout window. (3) Click shortcut toolbar + or - to zoom in or zoom out the layout window. (4) Try to click on the different menu to view the software provided items.

84

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Draw the channel waveguide in the layout window (1) From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. (2) In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. Note: Release the Linear Waveguide selection tool by clicking the Select tool after the Linear Waveguide is drawn in the layout. (3) To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 13).

Figure 13

Channel waveguide Properties.

(4) Click the Start tab and type the following values Horizontal offset (m): 0 Vertical offset (m): 1.5

85

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

(5) Click the End tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (m): 8.0 Vertical offset (m): 1.5 Explain (a) Here the Start and End tab control the waveguide x and z coordinator position. (b) Horizontal direction is z-direction; Vertical direction is x-direction. (c) In OptiFDTD, all the input boxes marked fx can accept variable and expression input. Click Evaluate to see the final value of the expression. (6) Input 1.5 (m) In the Width box

Explain: This is the channel waveguide Width

(7) Input 1 (m) In the Depth box

Explain: This is the channel waveguide y-direction position. It is the distance from the channel waveguide bottom to the y-directional original point.

(8) Input Linear1 in the Label box. This is the object name (9) Input ChannelPro1 in the Profile box Explain: This will link the linear waveguide trends with the defined channel profile.

(10) Click OK to finish the Channel waveguide setting.

Explain: (a) In summary, the values for Start Horizontal, Start Vertical, and Depth control the waveguide start point coordinator (1.5, 1.0, 0.0) m. The values for End Horizontal, End Vertical, and Depth control the waveguide end point coordinator (1.5, 1.0, 8.0) m. The width and thickness controls the waveguide dimension. (b) If the user wants to set the waveguide thickness ( y-direction thickness), please unselect Use Default checkbox under the Channel Thickness Tapering region. The user can then put a start position thickness and an end position thickness. If Use Default checkbox is select, then the waveguide thickness will be the total thickness that is defined in the profile designer.

86

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

10

Draw the Fiber waveguide in the layout window (1) From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. (2) In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. Release the Draw mode by select the select toolbar (3) To adjust the position and the shape of fiber waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (4) In the Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box, Select FiberPro1 as the profile from the Profile list box (See Figure 14).

Figure 14 Fiber waveguide properties

(5) Click the Start tab and insert the following values Horizontal offset (m): 0 Vertical offset (m): -1.5

87

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

(6) Click the End tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (m): 8.0 Vertical offset (m): -1.5 (7) In the Fiber Ry Tapering region, unselect User Default, select Linear in the Taper list box. Set the Start and End values as 2.0 ( the Fibers thickness in the y direction) (8) Input the value 2.0 (m) in the Width box ( the Fibers Width in the x-direction) (9) Input the value -1.5 (m) in the Depth box (the Fibers center position in the y direction). (10) Input Linear2 as the Lable name. (11) Click OK to finish the Fiber waveguide setting

Now the sample layout has been created. Please review the following for the further understanding of the layout concept

Explain

(a) Please note that the OptiFDTD designer environment is a 2D plane for xz view as shown in Figure 15. Each object may have the different depth reference to y-direction original position, but the OptiFDTD designer will show all these objects in this x-z plane top view as shown in figure 15.

88

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 15 OptiFDTD designer for the example layout.

(b) Figure 16 is the sketch for the OptiFDTD Designer concept fro the example layout.

89

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 16 Sketch for the designed layout

(c) OptiFDTD designer works only in the x-z plane, but a slice viewer is provided for you to observe the refractive index distribution in any slice in xy plane, yz palne and xz plane. To do this, Please set and input plane first, and Click 3D_Refr_Idx_Re(y) button that is under the layout window. You can specify the slice position and orientation to view to layout See Figure 17 (a)-(c).

Note: The refractive index image resolution is determined by the OptiFDTD simulation mesh size. Click Simulation Parameters in the Simulation menu to reset the mesh size.

90

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

(d) To modify the material or the simulation domain. Please click Profile and Material or the Wafer Properties to open the corresponding interface.

Figure 17 (a) Refractive indes distribution in xy plane at z=4.00m

91

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 18 (b) Refractive index distribution in yz plane at x=-1.5m

92

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

Figure 19

(C) Refractive index distribution in xz plane at y=1.5m

93

INTRODUCTION TO THE LAYOUT DESIGNER CONCEPT

94

KNOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 32-BIT AND 64-BIT SIMULATIONS

Know the difference between 32-bit and 64-bit simulations

OptiFDTD provides two types of FDTD simulations: 32-bit simulations (performed by 32-bit Simulators). 64-bit simulations (performed by 64-bit Simulators).

These simulation options differ in certain aspects of supporting features or. Memory The most important difference between these two simulator types is the memory limitation imposed on 32-bit simulators. All the 32-bit applications may utilize up to 2GB-4GB of memory for its purposes, dependent on the operating system. In case of 64-bit applications (simulators), this limit is in the range of Tera-Bytes. In the current Windows 64-bit this limit is around 16TB, which is far beyond RAM capacity supported by standard PC configurations. Operating System The 32-bit simulations can be executed under Windows 32-bit and Windows 64-bit operating systems. In case of Windows 32-bit, the operating system can provide to the simulator up to 2GB-3GB of memory, while the remaining 2GB-1GB is used by the operating system. Under Windows 64-bit, the operating system can provide the 32-bit simulator with up to 4GB of memory, while it will utilize another ~4GB for its operating system memory mapping needs. In case of 64-bit simulators, they can be executed only under Windows 64-bit operating system. One cannot execute a 64-bit application under a 32-bit operating system. Processor All the references to 64-bit Windows operating systems assume usage of a processor supporting EM64T architecture. In layman terms it means hardware support for 32bit and 64-bit applications. The currently manufactured Intel or AMD processors support this architecture, for example Intels Core 2 based multi-core processors. Summary In short - the main difference between the 32-bit and 64-bit simulations is that 64-bit simulators are capable of processing much larger designs. Due to the amount of data volume processed and generated by 64-bit simulators, the approach to the simulation result handling has changed. The notes below describe the main differences. Layout size 32Bit simulation can only use maximum 2GB of RAM. This means for a 3D simulation, the maximum mesh point number that can be handled will

95

KNOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 32-BIT AND 64-BIT SIMULATIONS

be roughly 300X300X300. When the mesh size exceeds this value, 64bit simulation is recommended. Time domain dynamic response 32bit simulation shows the dynamic field response in Simulator window 64bit simulation does not show the dynamic field response. Simulation process (percentage of the simulation) is displayed. The snapshot for time domain response in the certain time step for user selected observation area/line/point can be saved and viewed by Optiwave graph viewer Volume DFT field results (steady state response) 32bit simulators calculate and record volume DFT field response (steady state response) for center wavelength 64bit simulators do not store the DFT field response for the whole volume anymore. However, the steady state response is calculated and stored for Observation Area/Line/Point for user-defined wavelength range. This data can be observed in the Analyzer, after completion of the simulations. Observation Detector and Spectrum Analysis 32bit simulations will record all the time domain response in the Observation detector (observation area, line). User can specify any wavelength to perform the DFT spectrum analysis. 64bit simulations perform the spectrum analysis for observation line and observation area in simulator. No time domain response is recorded for Observation line and area. Spectrum results, for user pre-defined wavelength, are saved to analyzer (result) file. In the Analyzer, the user can select a wavelength from the previously defined list and observe the corresponding spectral results in observation area analysis. The user may define a wavelength range in the Layout Designer, in the 64-bit Simulation Parameters dialog box (click the Spectrum button). One must set an observation detector (Observation Point, Observation Line, and Observation Area) to collect calculation results for 64bit simulation. Simulation 32bit FDTD simulation supports single processor. 2D 64bit FDTD simulation support single processor in OptiFDTD 8.0. 3D 64bit FDTD simulation support multi-processor (core) 2D TFSF excitation is only supported in 2D 32bit simulation in OptiFDTD 8.0 Tutorial lessons Tutorial lessons specify the 32bit simulation to demonstrate the product features. However, one can always use the 64-bit simulations to perform calculations, or simulate an equivalent example configured for 64-bit simulations. Typically, the 64bit simulations are faster. If you use a 64-bit simulation instead of 32-bit one, then make sure that the following items are addressed: Please define an Observation Area/Line to collect steady state response, transmission function and reflection function If the input wave is Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave, please define the wavelength range (click on the Spectrum button) in the 64bit Simulation Parameters dialog box.

96

KNOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 32-BIT AND 64-BIT SIMULATIONS

This chapter is to help you familiarize yourself with the OptiFDTD Designer environment. Please use the following lessons for more detailed simulations on each project.

97

KNOW THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 32-BIT AND 64-BIT SIMULATIONS

98

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Lesson 1Getting started

The OptiFDTD software has four interdependent modules: OptiFDTD_DesignerCreate the photonic devices to model OptiFDTD_SimulatorPerform the FDTD simulation and DFT analysis OptiFDTD_AnalyzerPost-process the simulated data OptiFDTD Band SolverGenerate band diagram for photonic crystal

This lesson describes how to start using OptiFDTD. The procedures are: Create a new project
Opening OptiFDTD_Designer Initializing the project Opening the Waveguide Profile Designer Defining the material Defining the 2D and 3D channel profile Setting up the initial properties Drawing a Linear Waveguide Drawing a Ring Waveguide Inserting the Input Plane Observing the Refractive Index Distribution Setting up an Observation Point Setting up the simulation parameters Running the 32bit simulation

Create a design

Set up the Input Plane

Observe the Refractive Index Distribution Set up observation points, areas, and lines Run the simulation

99

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Analyze the simulation results

Opening OptiFDTD_Analyzer Analyzing the results Calculating the Mode Overlap Integral (MOI) Calculating the Input Overlap Integral (IOI) Calculating the Input Overlap Integral Scanner (IOIS) Calculating the Far Field Transform Performing the Observation Object Analysis Exporting results

Export results

100

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Create a new project

The following lesson uses a micro-ring resonator as a sample design. Note: The corresponding project file can also be found in the Sample file folder, Sample02_3D_Ring_Resonator.fdt. To create a new project, perform the following procedures.

Opening OptiFDTD_Designer
Action To open OptiFDTD_Designer, from the Start menu, select Programs > Optiwave Software > OptiFDTD 5.0 > Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer appears (see Figure 1)
Figure 1 OptiFDTD_Designer

101

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Initializing the project

Action To initialize the project, from the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 2)
Figure 2 Initial Properties dialog box

Opening the Waveguide Profile Designer

Step 1 Action To define the materials, in the Initial Properties dialog box, click Profiles And Materials. The Waveguide Profile Designer opens (see Figure 3).

102

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 3 Waveguide Profile Designer

Note: You can also open the Waveguide Profile Designer from the Start menu (see Opening OptiFDTD_Designer on page 101).

Defining the material

Step 1 Action In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder. A context menu appears (see Figure 4).
Figure 4 Context menu

Select New. The FDTD-Dielectric dialog box appears (see Figure 5).

103

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 5 FDTD-Dielectric dialog box

Type the following information Name: Waveguide2.0 Constant refractive index (isotropic)(Re): 2.0

4 5

To save the material, click Store. Note: Repeat steps 2 to 5 to create additional FDTD-Dielectric materials. Under the FDTD-Dielectric folder, double-click Air. The Air dialog box appears (see Figure 6).

104

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 6 Air dialog box

6 7

To set Air as the default FDTD-Dielectric material, select the Default check box. To save the change to Air, click Store.

Defining the 2D and 3D channel profile

Step 1 Action In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, rightclick the Channel folder. A context menu appears.

105

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears (see Figure 7).
Figure 7 ChannelPro1 dialog box

3 4 5

Type the following Profile name: waveguide To define the 2D profile, in the Material list under 2D profile definition, select Waveguide2.0 (refer to Figure 7). To define the 3D profile, under 3D profile definition: a. Type the following information (refer to Figure 7): Layer name: WG Width: 0.5 Thickness: 0.5 Offset: 0. b. In the Material list, select Waveguide2.0 c. Click Add.

106

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To save the channel profile, click Store. Waveguide appears in the Channel folder in the directory, in the dialog box title bar, and on the tab at the bottom of the layout. To return to OptiFDTD_Designer, either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer.

Setting up the initial properties

To set up the initial properties, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 Action In the Initial Properties window, click the Waveguide Properties tab. Type the following value (see Figure 8): Width (m): 0.5 From the profile list, select waveguide (Figure 8).

Figure 8 Initial Properties dialog boxWaveguide Properties tab

4 5

Click the Wafer Dimensions tab. Type the following value (see Figure 9): Length (m): 8 Width (m): 6

107

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 9 Initial Properties dialog boxWafer Dimensions tab

6 7

Click the 2D Wafer Properties tab. From the Material list, select Air (see Figure 10).
Initial Properties dialog box2D Wafer Properties tab

Figure 10

108

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Click the 3D Wafer Properties tab (see Figure 11).

Figure 11 Initial Properties dialog box3D Wafer Properties tab

9 10 11

Under Cladding, from the Material list, select Air. Under Substrate, from the Material list, select Air. Type the following values: Cladding thickness (m): 2.5 Substrate thickness (m): 0 Note: Cladding and substrate are two layers in the Y-direction that can have different materials and thicknesses. The Y-axis origin is at the interface between the substrate and cladding.

12

To finish the initial properties setup, click OK. The layout window appears (see Figure 12). Note: Click Zoom tool to enlarge the layout window.

109

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 12 Layout window

110

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Create a design
To draw a micro-ring resonator, first draw a linear waveguide by performing the following procedures.

Drawing a Linear Waveguide

Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window (see Figure 13). Note: Release the Linear Waveguide selection tool by clicking the Select tool after the Linear Waveguide is drawn in the layout.
Figure 13 Linear Waveguide

To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 14).

111

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 14 Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box

Click the Start tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (m): 0 Vertical offset (m): 2.0 Width (m): 0.5 Depth (m): 1.0 Label: linear1 Channel Thickness Tapering: Use Default (Channel: None)

Click the End tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (m): 8.0 Vertical offset (m): 2.0 Note: You can also set a variable and even the expressionclick Evaluate to see the final value of the expression. Horizontal means the z-direction. Vertical means the x-direction. Depth means the y-direction.

112

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

6 7

From the Profile list, select Waveguide. To save the new values and update the Linear Waveguide, click OK. The modified Linear Waveguide appears in the new position (see Figure 15).
Figure 15 Modified Linear Waveguide

113

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Drawing a Ring Waveguide

Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Ring Waveguide. In the layout window, drag the Ring Waveguide from what will be the center, to a point which will be the radius of the outside ring (see Figure 16).
Figure 16 Ring Waveguide

To adjust the position and the shape of the Ring Waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Ring Waveguide. The Ring Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 17).

114

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 17 Ring Waveguide Properties dialog box

Type the following values: Horizontal offset (m): 4.0 Vertical offset (m): 0.35 Major radius (m): 1.8 Minor radius (m): 1.8 Orientation Angle (degrees): 0 Channel Thickness Tapering: Use Default (Channel: None) Width (m): 0.5 Depth (m): 1.0 Label: Ring1

115

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Note: The Ring Waveguide will be an elliptic ring if the two radii are set to different values. 5 6 From the Profile list, select Waveguide. To save the new values and update the Ring Waveguide, click OK. The modified Ring Waveguide appears in the new position (see Figure 18).
Figure 18 Modified Ring Waveguide

116

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Set up the Input Plane

To insert the Input Plane and set the excitation, perform the following procedures.

Inserting the Input Plane

Step 1 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. Note: 2 The Vertical Input Plane is in the x-y plane for 3D. The Horizontal Input Plane is only functional with a 2D simulation. Multiple Input Planes are only allowed in a 2D simulation.

Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the Input Plane. A red line that presents the input plane appears in the layout window (see Figure 19).
Figure 19 Input Plane

117

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To set up the Input Plane properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane) in the layout window. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 20).
Figure 20 Input Field Properties dialog box

Set the time domain Input Plane information. a. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears. b. Wavelength (m): 1.4 Note: For Continuous Wave, Wavelength is the single wavelength to be simulated. For Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave, Wavelength is the carrier wavelength (center wavelength) for the pulse.

Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab. The time domain pulse graphics appear.

118

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Type the following values for the time domain input plane (see Figure 21). Time offset (sec.): 4.5e-14 Half width (sec.): 1.2e-14
Figure 21 Gaussian Modulated CW tab

Note: Both the time domain wave and frequency domain wave for the Input Plane appear. The Frequency domain information is obtained by FFT from the time domain series.

119

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To set up the general information (transverse field distribution) for the Input Plane, click the General tab (see Figure 22). a. Input Field Transverse: Modal b. Z Position (m): 0.63 c. Plane Geometry: Positive direction d. Label: InputPlane1 (default)
Figure 22 General tab

Note: Positive Direction means the that the Input Plane is excited to the positive z-direction. Negative Direction means that the Input Plane is excited to the negative z-direction.

120

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To solve the 3D transverse mode, click the 3D Transverse tab (see Figure 23).
Figure 23 3D Transverse tab

9 10

Type the following Input Amplitude value (V/m): 1.0 Click Find Modes. The Waveguide selection window appears (see Figure 24).

121

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 24 Waveguide selection dialog box

11 12

Select the Linear Waveguide check box. To open the mode solver, click Calculate Mode. The Globe Data: ADI Method dialog box appears (see Figure 25).
Figure 25 Global Data: ADI Method dialog box

13

Set the following: Solver: Complex Waveguide: Straight Mode (initial excitation): Full Vector, Along Y

122

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Wavelength (m): 1.4 (the same as the input wavelength by default, Read-Only) Number of Modes: 1 14 15 Click the Settings tab and set Boundary Condition: TBC To solve the mode, click Run. The 3D Mode Solver opens (see Figure 26).
Figure 26 3D Mode Solver

Note: 16 The 3D Mode Solver can take a while to start up. It can take several minutes to solve the mode. A message appears to advise you if no mode has been found.

After solving the mode, click the field (Ex, Ey) tab to view the field pattern (see Figure 27).

123

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 27 Major component Ey tab

17 18

To return to the Input Field Properties dialog box, close the 3D Mode Solver. To complete the Input Plane setup, click OK.

124

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Saving the layout

To save the layout you have created, perform the following procedure. Note: Do not save your project over the sample file provided. Step 1 2 Action From the File menu, select Save As. The SaveAs dialog box appears. In the sample folder, enter the name of the file and click Save. The new sample file is saved in the sample folder.

Note: .fdt is the file extension generated by OptiFDTD_Designer.

125

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Observe the Refractive Index Distribution

OptiFDTD provides a refractive index viewer to observe the refractive index distribution on any plane in three orientations. To observe the refractive index distribution, perform the following procedure.

Observing the Refractive Index Distribution

Step 1 Action Click the 3D Ref. Index tab at the bottom of the layout window. The 3D Refractive Index window opens (see Figure 28).
Figure 28 3D Refractive Index tab

126

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

2 3

To view the graphic in height plot format, from the View menu, select 3D Graph Items > Height Plot. To view the x-y plane refractive index distribution, under Orientation, select X-Y Plane (see Figure 29).
Figure 29 OrientationX-Y Plane

Move the Slicer slider to the desired position (see Figure 30)
Figure 30 Slicer

127

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To set more graphic view options, right-click anywhere in the graph (see Figure 31).
Figure 31 3D Graph Item view options menu

Set up observation points, areas, and lines

Observation point, Line, area, are the post-data detector. Field pattern, transmission function and reflection function (versus wavelength) can be obtained with these detectors Observation PointObserve the time domain and frequency domain response. The transmission function can be obtained from the Observation Point analysis If the point detector is put in the waveguide center where the peak value happens. Observation Area Observe the field pattern for a give wavelength. compute power transmission ratio, and normalized power versus wavelength. When Observation area is put at the transmitted area, the power transmission function can be obtained. When Observation area is put at reflection area (beyond the input plane), reflection function can be obtained. 32bit simulation will record all the time domain response in the Observation area, user can specify any wavelength to perform the DFT spectrum analysis in analyzer. 64bit simulation performs the spectrum analysis, no time domain response is recorded. Spectrum results for user pre-defined wavelength will be save to analyzer. User can select the wavelength form the list to check the corresponding spectral results in observation area analysis. To Pre-define the wavelength range for 64bit simulation, please click the Spectrum button in the 64bit simulation parameters dialog box. Observation LineOnly available for a 2D simulation. Observe the frequency domain response, compute power, and normalized power versus wavelength.

128

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Setting up an Observation Point

Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Click in the layout window where you want to place the Observation Points (see Figure 32).
Figure 32 Observation Points

Double-click the first observation point. The Observation properties -- Point dialog box appears (see Figure 33).

129

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 33 Observation properties -- Point dialog box

To adjust the position of the observation point, click the General tab and type the following: Horizontal Offset (m): 1.2 Vertical Offset (m): 2.0 Center depth (m): 1.25 Label: ObservationPoint1 (default)

130

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To select the field components, click the Data Components tab (see Figure 34).
Figure 34 Data Components tab

a. Under 3D, select the Ex check box. b. Under 3D, select the Ey check box. 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 for the second observation point, using the following values: Horizontal Offset (m): 7.0 Vertical Offset (m): 2.0 Center depth (m): 1.25 Label: ObservationPoint2 (default) Data Components: i. Under 3D, select the Ex check box. ii. Under 3D, select the Ey check box.

131

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Run the simulation

To run the simulation, perform the following procedures. Note: When you run this simulation for the first time, it is recommended that you run the 2D simulation first. To run the 3D simulation based on this sample file may take up a lot of CPU resources. It is suggested that you use FDTD_Analyzer to open the corresponding results file that can be found on the set-up CD.

Setting up the simulation parameters

Step 1 Action From the Simulation menu, select 3D 32bit Simulation Parameters. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 35).

132

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 35 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box

Type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (m): 0.08 Mesh Delta Y (m): 0.05 Mesh Delta Z (m): 0.08 Note: The total mesh number for each orientation will be calculated automatically, once focus is removed from the specific edit region.

To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears (see Figure 36).

133

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 36 Boundary Conditions dialog box

Type the following values for the boundary condition: Anisotropic PML layer number: 15 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 1.0 Power of grading Polynomial: 3.5 Note: Un-split Perfectly Matched Layer (UPML) was used for the boundary condition in this software. For more information, refer to the OptiFDTD Tutorials and Technical Background. The default setting for UPML parameters in OptiFDTD ensures that the outgoing waves are absorbed properly. We recommend that you use the default setting unless you are familiar with UPML boundary conditions.

5 6

To save the boundary condition setting, click OK. Under Time Parameters, perform the following: a. Click Calculate to calculate the time step value. The new value 8.3391023799538e-017 appears in the Time Step Size field (see Figure 37). b. Type the number of time steps to run: 10000 (see Figure 37).

134

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Note: The time step value is calculated from the minimum mesh size.
Figure 37 Time Parameters

From the Key Input Field drop-down list, select Input Plane1 and wavelength 1.4 (see Figure 38). Note: Key input selection is used to obtain the wavelength for DFT calculation in the simulation. For 3D simulations, there is only one input plane.
Figure 38 Key Input Field

Under DFT Options, select the DFT components that you want to simulate (see Figure 39).
Figure 39 DFT Options

Select Ey check box. Note: The discretized Fourier transform (DFT) will run for the selected field components for the key input wavelength in the simulator. The DFT results will be saved for performing post simulation analyses, such as Far Field Pattern, Mode Overlap Integral calculation, Input Overlap Integral calculation, and observation of the frequency domain field pattern.

135

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

10

To start 3D 32bit simulation, click Run in the simulation dialog box. Note: 64bit simulation on multiple core system will be much faster than 32bit simulation. To perform the 64bit simulation, please read the chapter know the difference between 32bit simulation and 64bit simulation or tutorial lesson 18

136

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Running the 32bit simulation

OptiFDTD_Simulator is a separate window that displays the simulation as it runs. Step 1 Action To observe the simulated field components in one slice, perform one of the following (see Figure 40):
Figure 40 3D Simulation results

From the View menu, select 3D Graph Items, and then select the type of view that you want (for example, Height Plot, Image Map, or Plane View). To open the a context menu listing the 3D Graph Items, right-click anywhere in the graph (see Figure 41).

137

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 41 3D Graph Items list

Select the field components and refractive index that you want to view by clicking the corresponding tab (see Figure 42).
Figure 42 Component tabs

To specify the slice orientation and the position, move the Slice Chooser slider to the desired value (see Figure 43)
Figure 43 Slice Chooser

To specify the step interval number for updating the simulated field data, select a new value from the View Update list (see Figure 44).
Figure 44 View Update list

To pause, resume, stop and finalize the simulation, from the Simulation menu, select the action you want to perform OR Click the corresponding button on the Simulation toolbar (see Figure 45).
Figure 45 Simulation toolbar

138

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To view the observation point in the simulator, from the View menu, select Observation Points. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears (see Figure 46).
Figure 46 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

To observe the time domain response on a single point, select the following (refer to Figure 46): field components observation point time

139

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

To observe the frequency domain response on a single point, select the following (refer to Figure 46): field components observation point Frequency FFT

To change the x-axis to frequency or wavelength, click Frequency/Wavelength.

140

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Analyze the simulation results

In this lesson, you have created a design, run a simulation, and loaded the corresponding simulation results file into OptiFDTD_Analyzer. The following analysis is based on this sample. OptiFDTD_Analyzer displays the simulation results and allows you to perform a postsimulation analysis. To analyze the simulation results, perform the following procedures. Note: If you do not use the simulation results file sample you created, the OptiFDTD software CD has the results file available. Copy it and open the file using the OptiFDTD_Analyzer.

Opening OptiFDTD_Analyzer
OptiFDTD_Analyzer can be opened in one of two ways. From OptiFDTD_Simulator When the simulation ends, a message appears and prompts you to open OptiFDTD_Analyzer (see Figure 23).
Figure 47 Message box

Action To open OptiFDTD_Analyzer and view the simulated results, click Yes. Note: When the simulation ends in OptiFDTD_Simulator, the results are saved automatically as a file with same name, but with a different file extension (*.fda). From the Start menu Step 1 Action From the Start menu, select Programs > Optiwave Software > OptiFDTD 4.0 > Results Analyzer. OptiFDTD_Analyzer opens (see Figure 48).

141

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 48

OptiFDTD_Analyzer

To open an existing simulation results file (*.fda), from the File menu, select Open (see Figure 49).
Figure 49 File menu

142

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Analyzing the results

Step 1 Action View the field distribution (after the DFT results) for the center (carrier) wavelength (see Figure 50).
Figure 50 Field distribution

Note: You can specify the orientation and the observation plane position. You can only view the simulation results and the Poynting Vector for the components that you selected for DFT calculation in the 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box.

Note: Proceed to the next step if the required components have been selected in the layout for the Power calculations. 2 Calculate and observe the Power value and the Normalized Power value (to the input plane) for the current slice position. Note: The power calculation is available only if related components are selected in the 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box.

143

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

The power types for each slice are power in two-direction polarization and the total power.

Calculating the Mode Overlap Integral (MOI)

You can perform the Mode Overlap Integral (MOI) calculation on the X-Y plane only. Step 1 2 Action Under Orientation on the Slice Chooser, select X-Y Plane. Move the slider position to 7.2m (see Figure 51).
Figure 51 Slice Chooser

In the Analysis Tools window, click the MOI tab. The MOI tab appears (see Figure 52).

144

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 52 MOI tab

Type or select the following information: DFT Result: Y-Polarization Region: Index X Lower: 0 X Upper: 75 Y Lower: 0 Y Upper: 50 Offset: 0 Note: The default parameters are for the entire slice region.

To find the mode on the current slice, click Mode. When the mode solver finds a mode, the Calculate button becomes available.

145

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Note: Ensure that the mode solving in this step has the same conditions are as the ones you used when you solved the mode for the Input Plane. Refer to Steps 13, 14, and 15 on page 122. 6 To perform the MOI calculation, click Calculate. The results appear under Statistics in the Result field (see Figure 53).
Figure 53 MOI calculation results

Calculating the Input Overlap Integral (IOI)

1 2 3 Compare the simulated output and the input Action Under Orientation on the Slice Chooser, select X-Y Plane. Move the slider position to 7.6m In the Analysis Tools window, click the IOI tab. The IOI tab appears (see Figure 54).
Figure 54 IOI tab

Step

146

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Note: Use the default settings for the IOI calculation parameters. 4 To perform the IOI calculation, click Calculate. The results appear in Statistics in the Results field (see Figure 55).
Figure 55 IOI calculation results

Calculating the Input Overlap Integral Scanner (IOIS)

Compare the input field and the output field at each X-Y slice. Power transmission ratio to the input wave at z-direction Action Under Orientation in the Slice Chooser, select X-Y Plane. In the Analysis Tools window, click the IOIS tab. The IOIS tab appears (see Figure 56).
Figure 56 IOIS tab

Step 1 2

147

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Note: Use the default settings for the IOIS calculation parameters. 3 To perform the IOIS calculation, click Calculate. The results graph appears in the Overlap Scan window (see Figure 57).
Figure 57 IOIS calculation results

Note: The IOIS calculation goes through the entire Z-direction.

148

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Calculating the Far Field Transform

Step 1 2 3 Action Under Orientation on the Slice Chooser, select X-Y Plane. Move the slider position to 7.6m In the Analysis Tools window, click the Far Field tab. The Far Field tab appears (see Figure 58).
Figure 58 Far Field tab

Note: You can select DFT components at any slice to perform the far field calculation. 4 Select the following information: DFT Result: Ey X-axis angle: 83.3056 Y-axis angle: 81.3692 Wavelength: 1.4m Refractive Index: 1

149

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

5 6

To perform the far field transform, click Calculate. To view the far field distribution, click the Far Field tab at the bottom of the layout window (see Figure 59).
Figure 59 Far field calculation result

To save the Far Field Transform results, in the Analysis Tools window, click Export.

150

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Performing the Observation Object Analysis

Step 1 Action From the Tools menu, select Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears (see Figure 60).
Figure 60 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

Click the Observation Point tab to perform the observation point analysis. a. To view the Time Domain Response: i. Click Times (fs). ii. Under Label, select the check box for the observation point or points that you want to view. iii. Select the tab under the graph for the field component that you want to view.

151

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 61

Observation Point analysisTime Domain Response

b. To view the Frequency Domain Response: i. Click Frequency DFT. ii. Under Label, select ObservationPoint2. iii. Select the field component Ey. iv. Set the wavelength/frequency range and the sampling point number. Minimum wavelength: 1.2m Maximum wavelength: 1.6m Sampling point: 1000 v. Click Update Graph to view the graph (see Figure 62). vi. To set the X-axis units, click Wavelength/Frequency.

152

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Figure 62 Observation Point analysisFrequency Domain Response

Note: You can specify the type of curveamplitude, phase, real part, Imaginary part, or decibel. c. To calculate the transmission/normalized response: i. Click Frequency DFT. ii. Under Label, select ObservationPoint2. iii. Select the field component Ey. iv. Set the wavelength/frequency range and the sampling point number. Minimum wavelength: 1.2m Maximum wavelength: 1.6m

153

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Sampling point: 1000 v. Select Normalized with. vi. In the Input plane list, select Input Plane1. vii. Select dB to view the transmission function. viii.Click Update Graph to view the graph (see Figure 62).
Figure 63 Observation Point AnalysisNormalized response

Note: The following two steps can only be executed if the Observation Area and the Line have been designed in the Layout window. 3 4 Click the Observation Area tab to perform the observation area analysis and follow the substeps for Observation Point. Click the Observation Line tab to perform the observation line analysis (2D simulation only) and follow the substeps for Observation Point.

154

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

Export results
You can export the DFT results, refractive index, Poynting Vector, and layout in the desired slice from OptiFDTD_Analyzer to a location that you choose.

Exporting results
Step 1 Action From the File menu, select Export. The Export Data dialog box appears (see Figure 64).
Figure 64 Export results

Select the results that you want to export, and click Export.

155

LESSON 1GETTING STARTED

156

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Lesson 2Input wave setup

OptiFDTD contains more features in the Input Wave set up and the simulation set up. The excitation set up for the simulation is done by the Input Plane which contain the following features: Time Domain Input Wave formation Continuous Wave with single wavelength Pulse wave with broad band spectrum

Transverse field distribution Modal Input Gaussian beam Rectangular beam User defined Transverse

Polarization formation Linear polarization Circular Polarization

Input Wave direction Power Amplitude The following procedures illustrate how to set up the input wave. There is no specific layout used to show the input wave setup in this lesson. The text explanation and graphs are in general format only. Note: This lesson presumes that you are familiar with the layout design and you use the sample lessons for reference.

157

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Drawing an Input plane in the layout

To draw an input plane in the layout, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. Place the Input Plane in the layout at the desired position. A red line that presents the input plane appears in the layout window (see Figure 65).
Figure 65 Vertical Input Plane

To set up the input wave properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane). The Input Field Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 66).

158

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 66

Input Field Properties dialog box

In the Input Field Properties dialog box, set the Position and the desired wave propagation direction. Note: For 2D simulations, a multiple input plane in vertical and horizontal position can be designed.

To select a Single Wavelength Input Wave: a. Click Continuous Wave (CW). b. Type the wavelength value.

To select a Pulse Input----Spectral Input Wave: a. Click Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave (GMCW). The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears in the Input Field Properties dialog box (see Figure 67).

159

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 67 Input Field Properties dialog boxGaussian Modulated CW tab

7 8

Type the center wavelength value in Wavelength box. Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab to edit the Pulse parameters. Time domain and frequency domain input wave curves appear in the user interface (see Figure 68). Note: Right-click on the curve to use the graph tool to view or edit the graph (zoom in or out, for example).

Figure 68 Time domain and frequency domain input wave curves

160

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

9 10 11

Set the time offset and the half width of the input wave in time domain. This will adjust the spectrum width. Right-click in the graph. The graph tool appears. Select Zoom in the toolbar, and zoom into the region to see the detail of the time domain and frequency domain wave.

Setting up the 3D Transverse Mode Input

Step 1 2 3 Action Click the General tab to return to the Transverse selection page Click Modal. Click the 3D Transverse tab to solve the 3D mode. The 3D modal transverse field summary page appears (see Figure 69).
Figure 69 3D Modal Transverse field summary

Input power value or the amplitude of the input transverse mode. Note: Amplitude value will be the maximum value of the input electrical field.

161

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Click Find Modes to solve the mode. The Waveguide selection dialog box appears (see Figure 70).
Figure 70 Waveguide selection dialog box

6 7

In the Waveguide list, select a waveguide to solve the mode. Click Calculate Mode. The Global Data: ADI Method dialog box appears (see Figure 71).
Figure 71 Global Data: ADI method dialog box

162

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

8 9

In the Global Data: ADI Method dialog box, set up the mode solver parameters, as shown in Figure 71. Click the Settings tab to set the initial guess field for solving the mode by ADI method. Note: Three types of Boundary condition are availableHomogeneous, Neumann, and TBC. TBC is suggested.

10 11 12 13

Set the Accuracy and Acceleration parameters for controlling the mode solver. Click the Wafer and Waveguide tabs to see the summaries of the wafer and waveguide properties. Return to the Global Data: ADI Method dialog box. Click Run. The Mode Solver interface appears (see Figure 72).
Figure 72 Mode Solver interfaceRefractive Index graph

When the Mode Solver finds the mode, results will be shown in the Mode solver as well as the Effective refractive index and transverse layout (see Figure 73).

163

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 73 Major component Ey view

164

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Setting up the 2D Transverse Mode Input

Step 1 2 3 Action Click the General tab in the Input Plane Properties dialog box. Click Modal. Click the 2D Transverse tab to solve the 2D mode (see Figure 74).

Figure 74 Input Plane Properties dialog box2D Transverse tab

Click Find Modes to set the 2D mode Solver. The Mode Solver 2D dialog box appears (see Figure 75).

165

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 75

Mode Solver 2D dialog box

5 6

Select the waveguides for Mode calculation. Click the Parameters tab to edit the calculation parameters (see Figure 76). Set Sample points Number of modes TE or TM selection
Figure 76 Parameters tab

166

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Click Calculate Mode. The calculation summary appears in the Mode Solver 2D dialog box (see Figure 77).
Figure 77 Mode Solver 2D dialog boxModes tab

From the mode list, select the mode. The mode distribution will be shown in the dialog box (see Figure 78).

167

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 78

Mode Solver 2D dialog box

9 10

Click Graph Setting to select the graph feature. Select a mode and click Apply Data. This mode will be used as the 2D transverse input wave.

Setting up the 3D Transverse Gaussian Beam Input

Step 1 2 3 Action Click the General tab in the Input Field Properties dialog box. In the Input Field Transverse area, select Gaussian. Click the 3D Transverse tab. The 3D Transverse tab appears (see Figure 79).

168

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 79 3D Transverse dialog box

4 5

Define the Gaussian beam in the Gaussian Transverse region. Select the Auto check box. The Waveguide tab appears (see Figure 80).
Figure 80 Waveguide tab

169

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Click the waveguide in the list to observe the position (see Figure 81).
Figure 81 Waveguide position

Click the 3D Transverse tab, and select Modal, Local, or User in the Effective Refractive Index area. Note: This refractive index will be used for calculating the magnetic components from electrical components and calculating the projection field if the tilting waveguide is used.

Specify the Gaussian beam polarization formation in the Polarization area (see Figure 82).
Figure 82 Polarization area

170

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

OptiFDTD provides five polarization options: 9 Linear X Linear Y Linear Theta Left Hand Circular Right Hand Circular

Set the Gaussian beam's power and amplitude.

Setting up the 2D Transverse Gaussian Beam Input

A 2D Gaussian beam setup is the same as 3D definition except that: 2D Gaussian beam is defined in one dimension TE /TM polarization

Setting up the 3D Transverse Rectangular Beam

The setup for a 3D rectangular beam is the same as that of the 3D Gaussian beam, except the wave formation stays in a rectangular shape in the rectangular region.

Setting up the 2D Transverse Plane Wave Input (rectangular beam)

The setup for a 2D rectangular beam is same as that of the 2D Gaussian beam, except the wave formation stays in a rectangular shape in the rectangular region.

Point Source
More information regarding the Point Source can be found in the Technical Background.

Setting up a Point Source

Step 1 2 Action Click Select Point Source from the toolbar. Place the Input Plane in the layout at the desired position. A red circle indicates the location of the point source (see Figure 83).

171

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 83

Point Source in Input Plane layout

To set up the input wave properties, double-click the Point Source in the layout. The Point Source Properties dialog box appears.

172

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

Figure 84 Point Source Properties dialog box

In the Point Source Properties dialog box, set up the position information: Note: Horizontal direction is z-direction Vertical direction is x-direction Depth controls the y-direction which is for 3D simulation.

Specify the Time Domain Waveform and enter a value in Wavelength. Note: If you want to use Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave, select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave in the Time Domain Waveform Selection dialog box.

6 7

Enter the Amplitude value in the Amplitude box (bottom right). In the 3D Field Component area, select an electrical component to hold the point source. Note: For 2D TE simulation, the point source is functional to major component Ey. For 2D TM simulation, point source is functional to major component Hy. Note: You can edit any point source using the Point Source Properties dialog box by making a selection from the drop-down list accessible with Select a point source. Also, multiple point sources can be placed in the same position.

173

LESSON 2INPUT WAVE SETUP

174

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Lesson 3Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation

OptiFDTD provides comprehensive design, simulation, and post-analysis tools for photonic crystal (PhC) and photonic band gap (PBG) analysis: layout designer provides the tools to define the lattice relation, atom properties, defects, wave path, and observation projects band solver is an independent simulation engine that gives the band-diagram for the defined lattice structure simulator can perform the plane wave simulation based on the periodic cell with a periodic boundary condition analyzer can view the field pattern and extract the transmittance/reflection coefficients Note: The band solver is investigated in Lesson 9. This lesson includes two samples: Sample 1 demonstrates how to define the PBG layout and how to extract the transmittance/reflection. The corresponding project file can be found in the Samples folder: Sample10_2D_TE_PBG_Y_Branch.FDT. Sample 2 demonstrates a plane wave simulation based on the periodic cell of PhC. The corresponding project file can be found in the Samples folder: Sample09_2D_TE_PBG_Domain_Reduced_Square_Lattice.FDT.

Sample 1---PGB Layout

Designing a PBG structure
To design a PBG structure, perform the following procedures. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new Dielectric material dialog box appears. Type the following information: Name: PBG_atom Refractive index (Re:): 3.1 6 To save the material, click Store.

175

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

PBG_atom appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar. To define the channel profile, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: Profile_PBG 2D profile definition Material: PBG_atom 3D profile definition Layer name: layer_01 Width: 1.0 Thickness: 1.0 Offset: 0.0 Material: PBG_atom 3 4 Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

To define the wafer and waveguide properties, perform the following procedure. Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, , type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: Profile_PBG Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 21.0 Width [m]: 15.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 3D Wafer Properties Cladding Thickness [m]: 1.0 Material: Air Substrate Thickness [m]: 1.0 Material: Air 2 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes.

176

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Creating the PBG structure

Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select PBG Crystal Structure. In the layout window, drag the cursor from a designated starting point and release, to create the PBG area. The PBG Crystal Structure appears in the layout window (see Figure 85).
Figure 85 BPG crystal structure in layout

To edit the crystal structure, double-click on the PBG structure in the layout. The Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box appears (Figure 86).

177

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 86 Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box

In Origin, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 1.0 Vertical: -6.928

5 6

Click Evaluate. Type/select the following: Depth: 0.0 Azimuth [deg]: 0.0

7 8 9

In Lattice Properties, Type, select 2D Hexagonal. In Fill, select Block. In Lattice Dimensions, type/select the following: Scale: 1.0 #A: 17 #C: 19 Note: When a 2D lattice is selected, the Y-direction cell #B is set to the default value of 1.

10

In Label, type PBGCrystalStruct1. Note: Do NOT close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box.

178

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Setting the atom properties

To set the atom properties, perform the following procedure in the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box. Step 1 Action In Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell, Add New, select Elliptic Waveguide from the drop-down menu and click New. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 87). In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.0 Vertical: 0.0 3 Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.3 Minor radius: 0.3 Orientation angle: 0.0 Channel thickness tapering: Use Default (Channel: None) Depth: 0.0 Label: Atom Profile: Profile_PBG. 4 Click OK. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box closes. Note: When you return to the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined elliptic waveguide listed in Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell. Note: If you close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined PBG structure in the layout window (see Figure 88).

179

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 87 Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box

180

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 88 PBG structure in layout window

There are three ways to create a cell with special properties. Step 1 Action In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, set the cell position nodes: Edit Options i: 8 j: 0 k: 0

Click Edit Cell (i,j,k) button. The Edit Basis Cell dialog box appears (see Figure 89).

181

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 89 Edit Basis Cell dialog box

Note: To deactivate the basic cell, deselect Cell On. The region will then be recovered to the wafer material. 3 4 5

[5.000,0.000]).

Select an atom in the list to edit (in this case, Elliptic Waveguide

Click Edit Properties. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.5 Minor radius: 0.4

Click OK.

The cell's index definition for Hexagonal is shown in Figure 90.

Figure 90 Cell index definition for Hexagonal

182

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 91 PBG layout with defective cell

OR Step 1 Action In the layout designer, to select the PBG lattice, click the PBG area. A green dot appears in the PBG structure and the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool becomes active. Select the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool icon. Double click on the atom in the Cell (13, 0, 5). The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.4 Minor radius: 0.5 5 Click OK to return to the layout window. The atom at cell (13,0,5) becomes the defective atom (see Figure 92).

2 3 4

183

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 92

Defective atom at Cell 13,0,5

OR Step 1 Action In the layout designer, to select the PBG lattice, click the PBG area. A green dot appears in the PBG structure and the Tools toolbar, including the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, becomes active.

Select the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, and right-click on the atom in cell (3, 0, 10). The PBG Cell Edit context menu appears (see Figure 93). Select Cell Properties. The Edit Basis Cell at 3,0,10 dialog box appears.

184

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

4 5

Click Edit Properties. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.3 Minor radius: 0.3
Figure 93 PBG Cell Edit context menu

In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 12.2 Vertical: -4.1

7 8

Click OK to close the Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box. Click OK to close the Edit Basis Cell at 3,0,10 dialog box. The atom at cell (3,0,10) becomes the defective atom (see Figure 94).
Figure 94 Defective atom at Cell 3,0,10

185

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

In general, you define the lattice and atom for all the cells in the PBG Lattice Properties dialog box. This is called the Unit cell information. It works like a template; the information in a specified cell is called Basic Cell information. The defect is made in the selected basic cell. In order to reset defective cells to the unit cell properties, in the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, Reset All to Unit Cell must be selected. Note: If you already tried this, please select Undo in the Edit menu, because the next step in this lesson uses the layout including the defective cells.

Recovering a defective cell at (8, 0, 0) to unit cell

Step 1 Action In the layout designer, to select the PBG lattice, click the PBG area. A green dot appears in the PBG structure and the Tools toolbar, including the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, becomes active. Select the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, and right-click on the atom in cell (8, 0, 0). The PBG Cell Edit context menu appears. Select Reset to Unit Cell. The cell values are reset to correspond to the basis cell.

Now you will create a Y-branch wave path in this PBG layout. Step 1 Action In the layout designer, to select the PBG lattice, click the PBG area. A green dot appears in the PBG structure and the Tools toolbar, including the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, becomes active. Select the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool, and right-click on the atom in cell (8, 0, -4). The PBG Cell Edit context menu appears. Select Cells Off. The cell is disabled. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to disable the following cells: (8,0,-3) to (8,0,1) (9,0,1) to (13,0,1) (13,0,2) to (13,0,12) (7,0,2), (6,0,3),(5,0,4), (4,0,5) (3,0,6) to (3,0,17)

3 4

186

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 95

PBG layout with new wavepath

Now you have finished the PBG layout. The next step is to set up the FDTD simulation. After you define a lattice, you can use the FDTD band solver to get the preliminary band-diagram ( see Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver on page 269). The PBG layout can also be defined by using VB scripting. The corresponding sample file for VB scripting can be found in the Samples folder: Sample21_Vbscript_PBG_Layout.FDT.

Inserting the input plane

To insert the input plane, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. To insert the input plane, click in the layout window where you want it placed. The input plane appears in the layout. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. Set Wavelength to 1.9 m. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. On the Gaussian Modulated CW tab, type/select the following: Time Offset [Sec]: 5.5e-14 Half Width [Sec]: 1.1e-14

187

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

7 8

On the General tab, select Input Field Transverse: Gaussian. On the 2D Transverse tab, type/select the following: Center Position [m]: 0.0 Halfwidth [m]: 0.8 Tilting Angle [deg]: 0.0 Effective Refractive Index: Local Amplitude [V/m]: 1.0

On the General tab, type/select the following: Plane Geometry Z Position [m]: 1.3 Positive direction

10

Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

Setting up the Observation Point

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation point. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box appears. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 19.5m Vertical: 4.33m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point1 5 6 7 8 On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Click OK. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box closes. Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 19.5m Vertical: -4.33m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point2

188

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

9 10 11

On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.8m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point3

12

On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Note: Observation Point1 and Observation Point2 are used to get the transmittance, while Observation Point3 is for the reflection.

Setting the 2D TE FDTD simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.1 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.1 3 4 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: -X: Anisotropic PML +X: Anisotropic PML -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5 5 6 7 In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 10000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and

wavelength:1.9.

189

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Note: The input planes center wavelength is used for DFT calculations. 8 Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator. Note: Before running the simulation, save the project to a file.

Observing the simulation results in OptiFDTD Simulator

Key things to observe: Refractive index distribution Observe the wave propagation in OptiFDTD Simulator (see Figure 96) Select View > Observation Point to observe the dynamic time domain and frequency domain response (see Figure 97).
Figure 96 Wave propagation in OptiFDTD Simulator

190

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 97 Dynamic time domain and frequency domain response

191

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Performing data analysis

In OptiFDTD_Analyzer, you can perform the following analysis for this sample: Observe the Layout, Refractive index, Poynting Vector, and field propagation pattern (DFT results) for the center wavelength (see Figure 98 for Poynting Vector-Z).
Figure 98 OptiFDTD Analyzer

Observe the transmission/reflection calculations Action To start the observation point analysis, from the Tools menu, select Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears (see Figure 99). Select ObservationPoint1 and ObservationPoint2. The simulation results from the observation points displays in the graph window. Type/select the following:

Step 1

Frequency DFT
Min. /f : 1.5m Max. /f : 2.3m Sample Point: 1000

192

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Normalize With InputPlane1 dB Amplitude

Figure 99 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

193

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Sample 2---Plane wave simulation based on the periodic cell of PhC

Most of the photonic crystal has the periodic lattice. In some cases, you may want to know the band gap effect for such a lattice. As discussed in the OptiFDTD Technical Background, this task can be simplified in an FDTD simulation using plane wave excitation and PEC/PMC boundary conditions. For example, Figure 100 shows a 2D square lattice going to infinity in both x- and z directions.
Figure 100 2D square lattice

You can simulate the structure shown in Figure 100 by taking a domain-reduced region (shown in Figure 101) with a plane wave and PMC boundary conditions for 2DTE wave.
Figure 101 Domain reduced region

194

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Designing a PBG structure

To design a PBG structure, perform the following procedures. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new Dielectric material dialog box appears. Type the following information: Name: PBG_atom Refractive index (Re:): 3.1 6 To save the material, click Store. PBG_atom appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar.

To define the channel profile, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: Profile_PBG 2D profile definition Material: PBG_atom 3D profile definition Layer name: layer_01 Width: 1.0 Thickness: 1.0 Offset: 0.0 Material: PBG_atom 3 4 Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

195

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

To define the wafer and waveguide properties, perform the following procedure. Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: Profile_PBG Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 10.0 Width [m]: 1.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 2 3 4 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes. In the Layout Designer, from the Draw menu, select PBG Crystal Structure. In the layout window, drag the cursor from a designated starting point and release, to create the PBG area. The PBG Crystal Structure appears in the layout window. To edit the crystal structure, double-click on the PBG structure in the layout. The Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 86 as a reference). In Origin, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 2.0 Vertical: -0.5 7 8 Click Evaluate. Type/select the following: Depth: 0.0 Azimuth [deg]: 0.0 9 10 In Lattice Properties, select 2D Rectangular. In Lattice Dimensions, type/select the following: Scale: 1.0 #A: 1 #C: 6 Note: When a 2D lattice is selected, the Y-direction cell #B is set to the default value of 1. 11 In Label, type PBGCrystalStruct1. Note: Do NOT close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box.

196

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Setting the atom properties

To set the atom properties, perform the following procedure in the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box. Step 1 Action In Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell, Add New, select Elliptic Waveguide from the drop-down menu and click New. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 87 as a reference). In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.5 Vertical: 0.5 3 Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.2 Minor radius: 0.2 Orientation angle: 0.0 Channel thickness tapering: Use Default (Channel: None) Depth: 0.0 Label: Atom Profile: Profile_PBG. 4 Click OK to close the Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box. Note: When you return to the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined elliptic waveguide listed in Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell. 5 Click OK to close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box. The defined PBG structure appears in the layout window (see Figure 102).
Figure 102 Defined PBG structure in layout window

197

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Inserting the input plane

To insert the input plane, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. To insert the input plane, click in the layout window where you want it placed. The input plane appears in the layout. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. Set Wavelength to 1.9 mm Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. On the Gaussian Modulated CW tab, type/select the following: Time Offset [Sec]: 6.0e-14 Half Width [Sec]: 1.0e-14 7 8 On the General tab, select Input Field Transverse: Rectangular. On the 2D Transverse tab, type/select the following: Center Position [m]: 0.0 Halfwidth [m]: 2.0 Tilting Angle [deg]: 0.0 Effective Refractive Index: Local Amplitude [V/m]: 1.0 9 On the General tab, type/select the following: Plane Geometry Z Position [m]: 0.5 Positive direction 10 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

Setting up the Observation Point

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation point. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box appears. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.25m Vertical: 0.0m

198

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point1 5 6 7 8 On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Click OK. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box closes. Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 8.5m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point2 9 10 11 On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 9.5m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point3 12 On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Note: Observation Point1 is used to calculate the reflection, while Observation Point2 and Observation Point3 are used to calculate the transmittance.

Setting the 2D TE FDTD simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.05 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.05 3 4 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type/select the following information (see Figure 103):

199

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

-X: Anisotropic PML +X: Anisotropic PML -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5
Figure 103 2D simulation parameters

Note: The rectangular beam with PMC boundaries on the edge realizes the TE plane wave simulation for the periodic structure. 5 6 7 In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 12000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Note: The input planes center wavelength is used for DFT calculations. 8 Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator. Note: Before running the simulation, save the project to a file.

wavelength:1.9.

200

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Observing the simulation results in OptiFDTD Simulator

Key things to observe: Refractive index distribution Observe the wave propagation in OptiFDTD Simulator (see Figure 104). Select View > Observation Point to see the dynamic time domain and frequency domain response (see Figure 105).
Figure 104 OptiFDTD SimulatorWave propagation

201

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 105 OptiFDTD SimulatorDynamic time domain and frequency domain response

202

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Performing data analysis

In OptiFDTD_Analyzer, perform the following procedure. Step 1 Action To start the observation point analysis, from the Tools menu, select Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears (see Figure 99). Select ObservationPoint1, ObservationPoint2, and ObservationPoint3. The simulation results from the observation points displays in the graph window. Type/select the following:

Frequency DFT
Min. /f : 1.5m Max. /f : 2.3m Sample Point: 1000 Normalize With InputPlane1 4 Click Update Graph to view the transmittance and reflection curves (see Figure 106).

203

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 106 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

Sample 3---Periodic Boundary Condition for PBG simulation

OptiFDTD has options to use simplified Periodic Boundary Condition (PBC). It can work with other boundary conditions such as Anisotropic PML, PMC, and PEC. With PBC, you can simulate a simple plane wave simulation, or a periodic layout simulation. For more information regarding PBC, see the Technical Background. The following procedure is based on . You can also open the project file Sample09_2D_TE_PBG_Domain_Reduced_Square_Lattice.FDT that can be found in the Sample file folder.

204

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Setting the 2D TE FDTD simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.05 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.05 3 4 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type/select the following information (see Figure 107): -X: PMC +X: PMC -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5

205

LESSON 3PHOTONIC CRYSTAL AND PHOTONIC BAND GAP SIMULATION

Figure 107 2D simulation parameters

Note: The rectangular beam with PMC boundaries on the edge realizes the TE plane wave simulation for the periodic structure. 5 6 7 In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 12000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Note: The input planes center wavelength is used for DFT calculations. 8 Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator. Note: Before running the simulation, save the project to a file. 9 Perform the simulation and Post-processing analysis as shown in . You will get the same result as shown in Figure 104.

wavelength:1.9.

206

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Lesson 4Multiple resonant Lorentz dispersive material simulation

Lorentz dispersive material currently can only be simulated in 2D. This lesson describes how to create, run, and analyze a Lorentz dispersive material simulation. The corresponding layout file is available in the sample folder of OptiFDTD: Sample06_2D_TE_Multi-Lorentz_Dispersion_Multi-Input.FDT. The corresponding results file is available on the OptiFDTD setup CD: Sample06_2D_TE_Multi-Lorentz_Dispersion_Multi-Input.FDA.

Creating a layout
Step 1 2 3 Action Open Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, from the File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. To open the Profile Designer and set up the material and profile, click Profiles And Materials. The Profile Designer opens. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Material folder, rightclick the FDTD-Dielectric folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The FDTDDielectric1 material definition dialog box appears. In the FDTDDielectric1 material definition dialog box, click Lorentz Dispersive. The Lorentz Dispersive dialog box appears (see Figure 1).

5 6

207

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Figure 1 Lorentz Dispersive

Select Lorenz Dispersive, and define the following parameters: Name: FDTD_Lorentz_res3

(F/m): 1.630130e00 0 (F/m): 2.630130e00

Resonance number: 3 8 9 Click Sellmeier Equation and input the corresponding values in the Sellmeier Equation table shown in Figure 1. Click Transform To Lorentz Model, then click Lorentz Model radio button. The Lorentz model resonant frequency, damping factor, and strength are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Frequency, damping factor, and strength

10

Click Store to save the material.

208

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

11 12

Repeat Step 4 to design a linear material with refractive index equal to 2.1 and the material with the name FDTDDielectric2.1, and click Store. In the directory under Profile Designer, under the Profile folder, right-click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. In ChannelPro1 dialog box, set the Profile Name as Lorentz_res3 and the 2D profile material as FDTD_Lorentz_res3. Save the profile. Repeat Steps 12 to 14 design another 2D channel profile with the name Linear2.1 and the material as FDTDDielectric2.1. Click Store to save the defined profile. Close the Profile Designer. In the Initial Properties dialog box, set the following parameters: Waveguide Properties Width: 1.0 Profile: Lorentz_res3 Wafer dimension Length: 10 Width: 8 2D Wafer Material: Air

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23

Click OK to start the layout designer. The Designer window appears. In the Waveguide Layout Designer window, from the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. Draw the waveguide in the layout at the desired position. The waveguide appears in the layout. To edit the waveguide position and properties, double-click the waveguide in the layout. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears.

209

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

24

Type the following parameters: Waveguide start position Horizontal: 0 Vertical:

Waveguide end position Horizontal: 10 Vertical: Width: 1.0 Depth: 0 Profile: Linear2.1 25 Repeat Steps 21 to 23 design another linear waveguide with following properties: Waveguide start position Horizontal: 0 Vertical: -2 Waveguide end position Horizontal: 10 Vertical: Width: 1.0 Depth: 0 Profile: Lorentz_res3 The two waveguides appear in the layout. The upper one is the Linear waveguide, and the lower one is the Lorentz Dispersive waveguide (see Figure 3). -2 Select the Use Default checkbox.

Select the Use Default checkbox.

210

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Figure 3 Linear and Lorentz Dispersive waveguides

Setting the Input Plane

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. Click in the layout to place the Input Plane in the desired position. A red line that presents the input plane appears in the layout window. To edit the Input Plane properties, in the layout, double-click the Input Plane. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears.

211

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

4 5 6 7

Click Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. Set the center wavelength to 1.35um To edit the Input Pulse, click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab. Type the following values: Time offset (sec): 4.0e-14 Half width (sec): 1.5e-14

8 9 10

Click the General tab, and then click Modal. Click the 2D Transverse tab to start solving the 2D TE fundamental mode for the lower waveguide, and then apply the solved mode as the input plane. Repeat Steps 1-8 to design another vertical input plane in the same position as Input Plane1, and set the Mode input for the upper waveguide.

Setting up the Observation point

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Click in the layout to place the observation point in the desired position. To edit the observation point properties, double-click the observation point in the layout. The Observation Point Properties dialog box appears. Type the following values: Center Position Horizontal: 7.5um Vertical: 2 Depth: 0 Data Components 2D TE: Ey (default) 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to design another observation point with the following values: Center Position Horizontal: 7.5um Vertical: 2 Depth: 0 Data Components 2D TE: Ey (default)

212

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Setting up the 2D simulation parameters

Step 1 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 4).
Figure 4 Simulation Parameters dialog box

2 3 4 5

Click TE. Type the following Mesh Delta X and Mesh Delta Z values: 0.05 To set the Anisotropic PML boundary condition parameters, click Advance. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type the following values: Number of Anisotropic PML layer: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5

6 7 8

Click OK. Click Calculate for time step size. In the Run for Time Steps (Results Finalized) field, type 3000.

213

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

From the Key Input Plane drop-down list, select Input Plane1 and wavelength:1.35 Note: The Key Input Plane center wavelength is used for the DFT calculation. To save the settings and start the 2D simulation, click Run. After the simulation ends, open OptiFDTD_Analyzer.

10 11

Performing the simulation

Step 1 Action In OptiFDTD_Simulator, view the refractive index distribution and the wave propagation (see Figure 5).
Figure 5 View simulation results in OptiFDTD_Analyzer

Note: The two input waves have the same parameters. The wave in the Dispersive waveguide is delayed because of the Dispersive effect.

214

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

To view the dynamic time domain and frequency domain response, from the View menu in the OptiFDTD_Simulator, select Observation Point Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box opens (see Figure 6).
Figure 6 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

215

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Performing data analysis

Using this example, you can perform the following analysis in OptiFDTD_Analyzer. Step 1 Action View the layout, refractive index, Poynting vector, and field propagation pattern (DFT results) for the center wavelength (see Figure 7).
Figure 7 View simulation results for the center wavelength

To view the Mode Analysis, from the Tools menu, select Crosscut Viewer. The X-Z Cut Visualizer dialog box appears (see Figure 8).

216

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Figure 8 X-Z Cut Visualizer dialog box

To start the observation point analysis, from the Tools menu, select Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box opens (see Figure 9).

217

LESSON 4MULTIPLE RESONANT LORENTZ DISPERSIVE MATERIAL SIMULATION

Figure 9 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

218

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Lesson 5Drude model for noble metal and surface plasma simulation
OptiFDTD provides two types of Dispersive material simulations: Multiple Resonant Lorentz Drude

The Drude model is supposed to be used for the Noble Metal and Surface Plasma in optical band. Note: It is recommended that you read the section in the Technical Background describing the Drude model equation. OptiFDTD also provides a sample for a Drude model simulation. The following explanation uses this sample file as an example. The corresponding layout file is available in the sample folder of OptiFDTD: Sample15_2D_TE_Drude_Model_Emitting_Diode.FDT. The corresponding results file is available on the OptiFDTD setup CD: Sample15_2D_TE_Drude_Model_Emitting_Diode.FDA.

Creating a project with Drude material

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, from the File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click the Profiles And Materials. The Profile Designer appears. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 of the Profile Designer, under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder, and select New. The FDTDDielectric1 material definition dialog box appears. In the FDTD Dielectric1 material definition dialog box, select Drude Dispersive. The Dispersive Material Definition dialog box appears (see Figure 1).

219

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 1 Dispersive Material Definition dialog box

In the Drude Material Definition dialog box, define the following parameters: Name: Drude_Silver_Ag

(F/m): 1.999
Plasma Frequency: 1.346390e+016 Collision Frequency: 9.617120e+013 7 8 Click Store to save the material. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 of the Profile Designer, under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder, and select New. The FDTDDielectric1 material definition dialog box appears. Design a linear material with refractive index equal to 1.414 and Material name Dielectricn=1.414. Click Store. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, Profile folder, right-click the Channel folder, and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears.

9 10 11

220

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

12 13 14 15 16

In the ChannelPro1 dialog box, set Profile Name to Ag and 2D Profile Material to Drude_Silver_Ag. Save the profile. Design another 2D channel profile with the name Core and material

Dielectricn=1.414.
Click Store.

Close the Profile Designer.

Designing the waveguides

Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, set the following parameters: Waveguide Properties Width: 0.12m Profile: Core Wafer dimension Length: 1.8m Width: 1.4m 2D Wafer Material: Air 2 3 4 Click OK to start the Layout Designer. The OptiFDTD designer window appears. From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. Draw the waveguide in the layout at desired the position. The waveguide appears in the layout. Note: Click the Select tool after drawing the waveguide. 5 6 Double click the waveguide to edit the waveguide position and properties. The Linear Waveguide properties dialog box appears. Set the following parameters: Waveguide start position Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 0 Waveguide end position Horizontal: 1.8 Vertical: 0 Select Use Default checkbox. Width: 0.12 Depth: 0.0 Profile: Core

221

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Design another linear waveguide with following properties: Waveguide start position Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 0.24 Waveguide end position Horizontal: 1.8 Vertical: 0.24 Select Use Default checkbox. Start thickness: 1.0 End thickness: 1.0 Width: 0.36 Depth: 0.0 Profile: Ag The two waveguides appear in the layout, the upper one is the linear waveguide, which will guide the wave, and the lower one is the Substrate Silver layer in the emitting diode (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 Waveguides in the layout

222

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

To enhance the Light Fitting, a corrugated surface plasma is deposited in the core. To do this, periodic rectangular linear waveguides are designed following the waveguide design outline in the previous procedure. Each of the rectangular linear waveguides that make up the corrugated surface plasma has the following common parameters (see Figure 3): Width: 0.02m Depth: 0.0m Select Use Default checkbox. Note: Thickness is only used for 3D layout definitions. Profile: Ag Start vertical: 0.05m End vertical: 0.05m The six Start/End horizontal positions are: i. 0.4m/0.5m ii. 0.6m/0.7m iii. 0.8m/0.9m iv. 1.0m/1.1m v. 1.2m/1.3m vi. 1.4m/1.5m

223

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 3 Waveguide materials

Setting the Input Plane

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. Insert the Input Plane into the layout at the desired position. A red line representing the input plane appears in the layout window. Double-click the Input Plane. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears. Select Continuous Wave. Set the center wavelength to 0.4um. Click the General tab, and then click Modal. Click the 2D Transverse tab to start solving the 2D TE fundamental mode for the Core (Waveguide Linear1) waveguide. Click Calculate Mode button. On the Modes tab, select Solved Mode. Click Apply Data.

224

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

11 12 13 14

Return to the Input Field Properties dialog box and click General tab. Set Plane Geometry Position to 0.125. Select Positive direction. Click OK.

Setting up 2D Simulation parameters

Step 1 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 4).
Figure 4 Simulation Parameters dialog box

2 3 4 5

Click TE. Set x-direction mesh and z-direction mesh to 0.005. Click Advanced. Set the Anisotropic PML boundary condition parameters: Number of Anisotropic PML layer: 14 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 1.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5

225

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

6 7 8

Click Calculate to get the Time Step Size. Set Run for 2000 time steps for finalization. From the Key Input Plane drop-down list, select Input Plane1 and Wavelength to 0.4. Note: The Key Input Plane's Center Wavelength will be used for the DFT calculation.

Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator.

Performing the simulation

When the Simulator starts, the emitting field can be observed (see Figure 5). Note: Please use the Rainbow_Banded Palette to view the graph. Right-click on the graph to set the graph control.
Figure 5 OptiFDTD_Simulator

226

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Performing data analysis

With the example used in this lesson, in the Analyzer you can perform the following analysis: Observe the Layout, Refractive Index Poynting Vector, field propagation pattern (DFT results) for the Input Wavelength (see Figure 6).
Figure 6 X-direction Poynting Vector

Select the Cross Cut in the Tools menu to get the Mode Analysis, slice power, and far field transformation. The X-Z Slice viewer appears (see Figure 7).

227

LESSON 5DRUDE MODEL FOR NOBLE METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 7 X-Z Slice viewer

228

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Lesson 62nd-Order nonlinearity simulation

OptiFDTD provides four types of nonlinear materials. 2nd Order 3rd Order Kerr-effect Raman-effect

All of these nonlinearities can be combined with the Lorentz dispersive model, which leads to dispersive nonlinear properties. To simulate the nonlinear material correctly, we recommend that you read the FDTD Basics. Note: Because the nonlinear material may have a high frequency response, a finer mesh size for the simulation may be required. Set a suitable power level in the input plane. If the input power is too low, the material may not be excited to nonlinear levels. If the power is too high, the output will be an unstable modulated wave. Nonlinear material parameters must have physical meanings.

The following examples explain how to design, simulate, and analyze the nonlinear materials.

2nd Order nonlinear material simulation Creating the layout

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Nonlinear folder and select New. A new FDTDNonlinear1 material dialog box appears. Select 2nd order. The 2nd order tab appears in the dialog box. Select/type the following: Name: NL 2nd Relative Linear Permittivity L : 2.7225

5 6

229

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

2nd Susceptibility 7

(2)

m V : 1.0e-6

To save the material, click Store.

Figure 8 FDTDNonlinear1 material definition dialog box

Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new FDTDDielectric1 material dialog box appears. Select/type the following information: Name: Dielectric_1.65 Const Ref. Idx N Re: 1.65

10

To save the material, click Store. Dielectric_1.65 appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar.

To define the channel profile, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: NL 2nd_1 2D profile definition

230

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Material: NL 2nd 3 Click Store.

231

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Create a second profile: Profile name: Dielectric 1.65_1 2D profile definition Material: Dielectric 1.65

5 6

Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

To define the wafer and waveguide properties, perform the following procedure. Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: NL 2nd_1 Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 10.0 Width [m]: 5.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 2 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes and the layout window appears.

To create the waveguide, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Click the Start tab. Under Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 3 Vertical: 0 6 7 Click the End tab. Under Offset, type the following values: Horizontal (m): 10.0 Vertical (m): 0.0 8 In Channel Thickness Tapering, select Use Default (Channel:None).

4 5

232

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Type/select the following: Width (m): 1.0 Depth (m): 0.0 Label: Linear2 Profile: NL 2nd_1

10 Step 1

Repeat steps [1] through [9] to create another linear waveguide in the layout. Action In Start > Offset, type the following values. Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 0

In End > Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 3 Vertical: 0

Type/select the following: Width (m): 1.0 Depth (m): 0.0 Label: Linear1 Profile: Dielectric 1.65_1

The two waveguides appear in the layout. The one on the left is the linear waveguide, and the one on the right is the nonlinear waveguide (see Figure 9).

233

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 9 Waveguides in layout

Inserting the input plane

To insert the input plane, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. To insert the input plane, click in the layout window where you want it placed. The input plane appears in the layout. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. Select Continuous Wave. Set Wavelength to 1.5 m. On the General tab, type/select the following: Input Field Transverse: Modal Plane Geometry Z Position [m]: 1.25 Positive direction

234

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

7 8 9 10 11 12

On the 2D Transverse tab, click Find Modes. The Mode Solver 2D dialog box appears. On the Waveguides tab, select Linear1. Click Calculate Mode. The Modes tab is activated. On the Modes tab, select the mode. Click Apply Data. The Mode Solver 2D closes. On the 2D Transverse tab, select the Power radio button, and type the following: Power [W/m]: 16.0 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

13

Setting up the Observation Point

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation point. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box appears. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 2.5m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint1 5 6 On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Click OK. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box closes. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to create the following additional observation points with the following information: On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 4.5m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint2 Click OK.

235

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 6.0m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint3 Click OK. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 7.4m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint4 Click OK. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 9.0m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint5 Click OK. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.625m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Label: ObservationPoint6 Click OK.

Setting the observation area

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation XZ. Place the Observation Area in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation area. The Observation Properties -- XZ Area dialog box appears.

236

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 3.0m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0m Z length: + 1.5 X length: + 1.5 Label: ObservationArea1

5 6

On the Data Components tab, select the following: 2D TE: Ey, Hx, Hz Click OK.

Setting the observation line

The observation line is only used for 2D simulations. It is used to show field distribution along the line for the user input wavelength calculate the outgoing power in the line for user input wavelength calculate the absolute power spectrum and normalized transmittance power spectrum (to the input power) Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Vertical Line. Place the Observation Line in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation line. The Observation Properties -- Vertical Line dialog box appears. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 9.5m Vertical: 0.0m X length: + 2.0 Label: ObservationLine1 5 6 On the Data Components tab, select the following: 2D TE: Ey, Hx, Hz Click OK. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to create an additional observation line with the following information: 7 On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 6.5m Vertical: 0.0m

Step 1 2 3 4

237

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

X length: + 2.0 Label: ObservationLine2 8 9 On the Data Components tab, select the following: 2D TE: Ey, Hx Click OK. The observation components of the project can be seen in Figure 10.
Figure 10 Observation components of project

Setting the 2D simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 11). Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.05 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.05

238

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 11 Simulation Parameters dialog box

3 4

Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 20 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5

5 6 7

In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 2000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Note: The input planes center wavelength is used for DFT calculations.

wavelength:1.5.

Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator. Note: Before running the simulation, save the project to a file.

239

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Observing the simulation results in OptiFDTD Simulator

Key things to observe: Field propagation pattern in OptiFDTD Simulator (see Figure 12)

Select View > Observation Point to observe the dynamic time domain and frequency domain response (see Figure 13).
Figure 12 Field propagation pattern

240

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 13 Observation point

Performing data analysis

When the simulation ends, a message appears and prompts you to open OptiFDTD_Analyzer (see Figure 23).
Figure 14 Message box

241

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Action To open OptiFDTD_Analyzer and view the simulated results, click Yes. Note: When the simulation ends in OptiFDTD_Simulator, the results are saved automatically as a file with same name, but with a different file extension (*.fda). Observe the layout, refractive index, Poynting vector, and field propagation pattern (DFT results) for the input wavelength (see Figure 15 for Poynting vector in z-direction).
Figure 15 Poynting vector in z-direction

Select Tools > Crosscut Viewer. The X-Z Cut Visualizer dialog box appears.

You can do the mode analysis, mode overlap integral calculation, slice power calculation, and far field transformation (see Figure 16).

242

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 16 X-Z Cut Visualizer

Select Tools > Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears (see Figure 17).

243

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 17 Observation Area Analysis dialog box

Click the Observation Line tab to start the observation line analysis. The field pattern and the corresponding power for the user input wavelength in the observation line appear in the dialog box (see Figure 18).

244

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

Figure 18 Observation field pattern and power in observation line

You can also follow the same procedure to perform another nonlinear material simulation. See the following sample files:

Sample12_2D_TE_3rd_Order_Nonlinear.fdt Sample13_2D_TE_Kerr_Nonlinear.fdt

In general, the Kerr effect and Raman effect belong to the 3rd-order nonlinearity. However, the Kerr effect uses a special model to consider photonic response time, while the Raman model considers both the response time and the oscillating frequency.

245

LESSON 62ND-ORDER NONLINEARITY SIMULATION

246

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Lesson 7Four wave mixing

OptiFDTD provides two dimension nonlinearity and multiple input wave simulations, thereby enabling you to simulate the Four Wave Mixing (FWM) effect. The following lesson outlines how OptiFDTD performs a FWM simulation. To create the Four Wave Mixing layout, perform the following procedures.

Designing a four-wave mixing layout

To design the four-wave mixing materials, perform the following procedures. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new FDTDDielectric1 material dialog box appears. Select/type the following information: Name: FDTD_1.65 Const Ref. Idx N Re: 1.65 6 To save the material, click Store. FDTD_1.65 appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Nonlinear folder and select New. A new FDTDNonlinear1 material dialog box appears. Select Kerr. The Kerr tab appears in the dialog box.

247

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Select/type the following: Name: FDTD_NL_Kerr Relative Linear Permittivity: 2.7225 Response Time: 2.0e-15 Permittivity: 2.0e-18

10

To save the material, click Store.

Figure 19 FDTD_NL_Kerr material

To define the channel profile, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: NL_Kerr 2D profile definition Material: FDTD_NL_Kerr 3 Click Store.

248

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Create a second profile: Profile name: Linear_WG 2D profile definition Material: FDTD_1.65

5 6

Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

To define the wafer and waveguide properties, perform the following procedure. Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, , type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: NL_Kerr Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 15.0 Width [m]: 10.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 2 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes and the layout window appears.

To create the waveguide, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. Note: Release the Linear Waveguide selection tool by clicking the Select tool after the Linear Waveguide is drawn in the layout. 3 To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Click the Start tab. Under Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 4.0 Vertical: 0 6 7 Click the End tab. Under Offset, type the following values: Horizontal (m): 13.00 Vertical (m): 0.0

4 5

249

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

8 9

In Channel Thickness Tapering, select Use Default (Channel:None). Type/select the following: Width (m): 8.0 Depth (m): 0.0 Label: linear4 Profile: NL_Kerr

10 11

Click OK. Repeat steps [1] through [3] to create three input linear waveguides in the layout. Note: The input waveguide is used to input three different wavelength waves into the nonlinear material.

Input Waveguide 1 properties: Step 1 Action In Start > Offset, type the following values. Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 0 2 In End > Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 4 Vertical: 0 3 4 In Channel Thickness Tapering, select Use Default (Channel:None). Type/select the following: Width (m): 1.0 Label: linear1 Depth (m): 0.0 Profile: Linear_WG 5 Click OK.

Input Waveguide 2 properties: Step 1 Action In Start > Offset, type the following values. Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 1.2 2 In End > Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 4 Vertical: 1.2

250

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

3 4

In Channel Thickness Tapering, select Use Default (Channel:None). Type/select the following: Width (m): 1.0 Depth (m): 0.0 Label: linear2 Profile: Linear_WG

Click OK. Input Waveguide 3 properties:

Step 1

Action In Start > Offset, type the following values. Horizontal: 0 Vertical: -1.2

In End > Offset, type the following values: Horizontal: 4 Vertical: -1.2

3 4

In Channel Thickness Tapering, select Use Default (Channel:None). Type/select the following: Width (m): 1.0 Depth (m): 0.0 Label: linear3 Profile: Linear_WG

Click OK.

251

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Figure 20 Input waveguides

Setting the input wave

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. To insert the input plane, click in the layout window where you want it placed. The input plane appears in the layout. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. On the General tab, type/select the following:

Continuous Wave
Wavelength [m]: 1.4 Input Field Transverse: Modal Plane Geometry: Z Position [m]: 1.0

252

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

5 6 7 8 9 10

On the 2D Transverse tab, click Find Modes. The Mode Solver 2D dialog box appears. On the Waveguides tab, select Linear1. Click Calculate Mode. The Modes tab is activated. On the Modes tab, select the mode. Click Apply Data. The Mode Solver 2D closes. On the 2D Transverse tab, select the Amplitude radio button and type the following: Amplitude [V/m]: 2.0e09 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes. Repeat steps [1] through [10] to create a second vertical input plane with the following data: Vertical Input Plane 2 properties:

11 12

Step 1

Action In the Input Field Properties dialog box, select/type the following:

Continuous Wave
Wavelength [m]: 1.55 2 On the General tab, type/select the following: Input Field Transverse: Modal Plane Geometry: Z Position [m]: 1.0 3 4 5 6 7 8 Click Find Modes. The Mode Solver 2D dialog box appears. On the Waveguides tab, select Linear2. Click Calculate Mode. The Modes tab is activated. On the Modes tab, select the mode. Click Apply Data. The Mode Solver 2D closes. On the 2D Transverse tab, select the Amplitude radio button and type the following: Amplitude [V/m]: 2.0e09 9 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

253

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Vertical Input Plane 3 properties: Step 1 Action In the Input Field Properties dialog box, select/type the following:

Continuous Wave
Wavelength [m]: 1.60 2 On the General tab, type/select the following: Input Field Transverse: Modal Plane Geometry: Z Position [m]: 1.0 3 4 5 6 7 8 Click Find Modes. The Mode Solver 2D dialog box appears. On the Waveguides tab, select Linear3. Click Calculate Mode. The Modes tab is activated. On the Modes tab, select the mode. Click Apply Data. The Mode Solver 2D closes. On the 2D Transverse tab, select the Amplitude radio button and type the following: Amplitude [V/m]: 2.0e09 9 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

Setting up the Observation Point

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation point. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box appears. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 6.0m Vertical: 0.0m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point1

254

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

5 6 7 8

On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Click OK. The Observation Properties -- Point dialog box closes. Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 6.0m Vertical: 1.2m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point2 Click OK.

9 10

Repeat steps 1 to 5 and create another Observation Point with the following information. On the General tab: In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 6.0m Vertical: -1.2m Center depth: 0.0 m Label: Observation Point3

11 12

On the Data Components tab, ensure that 2D TE: Ey is selected (default). Click OK.

Setting the 2D simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.1 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.1 3 4 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: -X: Anisotropic PML +X: Anisotropic PML -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML

255

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5 5 6 7 In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 3000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Note: The input planes center wavelength is used for DFT calculations. 8 Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator. Note: Save your layout before starting the simulation.

wavelength:1.4.

256

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Observing the simulation results

Key things to observe: wave propagation pattern in time domain (see Figure 21) field response in time domain and frequency domain for observation point (select View > Observation Point to see the dynamic time domain and frequency domain response (see Figure 22).

Figure 21 OptiFDTD Simulatorwave propagation pattern in time domain

257

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Figure 22 OptiFDTD Simulatortime domain and frequency domain for observation point

Performing data analysis

Spectral analysis in observation point When the simulation ends, a message appears and prompts you to open OptiFDTD_Analyzer (see Figure 23).
Figure 23 Message box

Step 1

Action To open OptiFDTD_Analyzer and view the simulated results, click Yes. Note: When the simulation ends, the results are saved automatically as a file with same name but a different file extension (*.fda).

258

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

2 3

Select Tools > Observation Area Analysis. The Observation Area Analysis dialog box appears. On the Observation Point tab, type/select the following:

Observation Point1 Frequency DFT

Min. /f : 0.9m Max. /f : 2.8m Sample Point: 1000 4 Click Update Graph to view updated results. The spectral response in Observation Point1 are displayed, and the four wave mixing effect can be seen in the curve (see Figure 24).

Figure 24 OptiFDTD_AnalyzerObservation point results analysis

259

LESSON 7FOUR WAVE MIXING

Notes:

260

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Lesson 8Plane wave simulation

OptiFDTD provides two special boundary conditions---perfect electrical conductor (PEC) boundary and perfect magnetic conductor (PMC) boundary. The two boundary conditions can works with Anisotropic PML together to realize the plane wave simulation. For more details of these boundary conditions, please see the Technical Background. This lesson presents a 2D plane wave simulations and 3D plane wave simulation. Note: Due to the PMC and PEC setting, plane wave simulation is only functional with symmetrical structures.

2D-TE plane wave in unique material Creating a layout

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Open the Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new Dielectric material dialog box appears. Type the following information: Name: N=2 Refractive index (Re:): 2.0 6 To save the material, click Store. N=2 appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar.

261

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Defining the channel profile

Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: Profile_n=2 2D profile definition Material: N=2 3D profile definition Layer name: layer_01 Width: 1.0 Thickness: 1.0 Offset: 0.0 Material: N=2 Click Add. 3 4 Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

Defining wafer and waveguide properties

Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: Profile_n=2 Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 8.0 Width [m]: 4.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 3D Wafer Properties Cladding Thickness [m]: 2.0 Material: Air Substrate Thickness [m]: 2.0 Material: Air 2 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes.

262

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Inserting the input plane

To insert the input plane, perform the following procedure. Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. To insert the input plane, click in the layout window where you want it placed. The input plane appears in the layout. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. On the General tab, type/select the following:

Continuous Wave
Wavelength [m]: 1.55 Input Field Transverse: Rectangular Plane Geometry: Z Position [m]: 1.0 5 On the 2D Transverse tab, type/select the following: Center Position [m]: 0.0 Halfwidth [m]: 5.0 Tilting Angle [deg]: 0 Effective Refractive Index: Local Amplitude [V/m]: 1.0 6 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

Setting the 2D TE FDTD simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Polarization: TE Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.05 Mesh Delta Z [m]: 0.05 3 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. -X: PMC +X: PMC -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML

263

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 5.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 Click OK. The Boundary Conditions dialog box closes. In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 1000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator.

wavelength:1.55.

264

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Running the 2D TE plane wave simulation

When you start the simulation, the plane wave propagation can be observed (see Figure 25).
Figure 25 OptiFDTD Simulator

265

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

3D-Y-direction polarized plane wave in unique material

Using the same layout created in 2D-TE plane wave in unique material, create another file with the same layout by selecting File > Save As and using a different file name. Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action From the Edit menu, select Wafer Properties. The Wafer Properties dialog box appears. Click the 3D Wafer Properties tab and set the Cladding: Material and Substrate Material to N=2. Click OK. The Wafer Properties dialog box closes. To edit the input plane, double-click on the input plane in the layout. The Input Plane Properties dialog box appears. On the General tab, type/select the following:

Continuous Wave
Wavelength [m]: 2.0 Input Field Transverse: Rectangular Plane Geometry: Z Position [m]: 1.0 6 On the 3D Transverse tab, type/select the following: Center Position [m] X: 0.0 Halfwidth [m] X: 5.0 Center Position [m] Y: 0.0 Halfwidth [m] Y: 5.0 Tilting Angle [deg]: 0 Effective Refractive Index: Local Polarization: LinearY Select the Amplitude radio button and type: Amplitude [V/m2]: 1.0 7 Click OK. The Input Field Properties dialog box closes.

266

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Setting the 3D-Y-direction polarized plane wave simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 3D Simulation Parameters. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type/select the following information: Mesh Delta X [m]: 0.1 Mesh Delta Y [m]: 0.1 Mesh Delta Z [m]: 0.1 3 Click Advanced.... The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. -X: PMC +X: PMC -Y: PEC +Y: PEC -Z: Anisotropic PML +Z: Anisotropic PML Anisotropic PML Calculation Parameters Number of Anisotropic PML Layers: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameters: 1.0 Power of Grading Polynomial: 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 9 Click OK. The Boundary Conditions dialog box closes. In Time Parameters, click Calculate. The default time step size is calculated. Select Run for 1000 Time Steps (Results Finalized). Select Key Input Information: Input Plane1 and Select DFT Options: Electric Components: Ey. Click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator.

wavelength:2.00.

When the simulation is running, the plane wave effect can be observed in the simulator (see Figure 26).

267

LESSON 8PLANE WAVE SIMULATION

Figure 26 3D Y-direction polarized plane wave

268

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver

FDTD Band Solver in OptiFDTD is a supplementary tool for the Photonic Crystal (PhC) and Photonic Band Gap (PBG) structure. Currently it employs the FDTD method and generates what is called the Band Diagram. For the transmission and reflection analysis for PhC and PBG, it is still suggested to use the conventional FDTD method demonstrated in Lesson 3Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation, because the FDTD simulation for generating the band diagram is dependent on the initial condition, Bloch's periodic boundary condition, and sufficient monitor points. This means that there is no guarantee that all bands will be found. In future releases, we will update the PWE method, which will guarantee that all the necessary bands will be found. To start the band solving, you need to define a photonic lattice structure in the layout window. If no photonic crystal lattice exists in the layout window, then the FDTD band solver is not activethe 2D band solver item in the simulation menu is disabled.

Photonic crystal structure Creating a layout

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Open the OptiFDTD Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new Dielectric material dialog box appears. Type the following information: Name: er=8.9 Refractive index (Re:): 2.983287 6 Click Store.

269

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Defining the channel profile

Step 1 2 Action Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: Profile_PhC 2D profile definition Material: er=8.9 3D profile definition Layer name: layer_01 Width: 1.0 Thickness: 1.0 Offset: 0.0 Material: er=8.9 3 4 5 Click Add. Click Store. Close the Profile Designer.

Defining wafer and waveguide properties

Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 1.0 Profile: Profile_PhC Wafer Dimensions Length [m]: 10.0 Width [m]: 10.0 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air 3D Wafer Properties Cladding Thickness [m]: 1.0 Material: Air Substrate Thickness [m]: 1.0 Material: Air 2 Click OK. The Initial Properties dialog box closes.

270

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Creating the PBG crystal structure

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select PBG Crystal Structure. Click in the layout window to create the PBG area. The PBG Crystal Structure appears in the layout window. Click on the Select tool. To set the PBG properties, double-click on the PBG Crystal Structure in the layout. The Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 27).
Figure 27 Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box

In Origin, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 3.0 Vertical: -3.0

6 7

Click Evaluate. Type/select the following: Depth: 0.0 Azimuth [deg]: 0.0

271

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

8 9

In Lattice Properties, select Type: 2D Rectangular. In Lattice Dimensions, type/select the following: Scale: 1.0 #A: 6 #C: 6

10

In Label, type PBGCrystalStruct1. Note: Do NOT close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box.

Setting the atom properties

To set the atom properties, perform the following procedure in the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box. Step 1 Action In Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell, Add New, select Elliptic Waveguide from the drop-down menu and click New. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.0 Vertical: 0.0 3 Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.2 Minor radius: 0.2 Orientation Angle: 0.0 Channel Thickness Tapering: Use Default (Channel: None) Depth: 0.0 Label: Atom Profile: Profile_PhC. 4 Click OK. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box closes. Note: When you return to the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined elliptic waveguide listed in Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell (see Figure 29). 5 Click OK in the Crystal Lattic Properties dialog box.

272

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Figure 28

Defined elliptic waveguide in Unit Cell Edit table

Figure 29 Defined PhC structure in layout

273

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Band Solver parameters

When you open the 2D Band Solver Parameters dialog box (from the layout designer Simulation menu), OptiFDTD automatically checks to see if the lattice structure exists in the layout. Available lattice structures are listed under Domain, in the Lattice Name drop-down list. Currently only 2D square lattice and 2D hexagonal lattice are supported. The FDTD simulation takes one unit cell as the fundamental periodic cell. You can specify how many unit cells are to be used for the simulation under Domain. This is controlled by Supercells #X (in x -direction) and #Z (in z-direction). Usually a 11 cell (unit cell) is good enough for extracting the band diagram. You can also specify the TE or TM wave under Polarization. When you specify the supercell, you then need to set the mesh size for the FDTD simulation, in Mesh. The FDTD simulation finds the eigen modes for one given K-vector. The K-vectors (a series value) are defined under K-vector Path. The Division number refers to how many K-vector sampling points there are for each sub-K-vector path. Please refer to the Technical Background to see how we set the default K-path. The FDTD band solver calculation is controlled by four items, other than the mesh: # Bandsthe number of modes extracted from the FDTD simulation. Thresholdthe eigen value is obtained from the spectrum response which the peak value is normalized to unit. If sub-peak value is smaller than this threshold value, then the value is not regarded as a mode. Time Step Size (s)domain size, time interval for FDTD simulation. Time Steps (Power of 2)FFT is used to get the spectrum response. The FDTD simulation needs to run for 2N time steps to match the FFT requirement. So the value of N should be specified.

274

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Setting the band solver simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Band Solver Parameters. The 2D Band Solver Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 30). Type/select the following information: Lattice Name: PBGCrystalStruc1 Supercells: #X: 1 #Z: 1 K-vector Path: # Divisions: 10 Polarization: TE Mesh: # Steps X: 20 # Steps Z: 20 Calculation: # of Bands: 12 Threshold: 0.05 Time Step Size [s]: Auto Time Steps [Power of 2]: 14 3 Click Run to start the OptiFDTD_BandSolver (see Figure 31).
Figure 30 2D Band Solver Parameters dialog box

275

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

The band diagram is updated instantaneously for each K-vector value. The corresponding K-vector value is shown in the output box at the bottom of the OptiFDTD_BandSolver dialog box.
Figure 31 OptiFDTD_BandSolver

When the simulation is finished, the results are saved to a file with a *.bnd extension.

276

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Viewing the simulation results

Step 1 2 Action In the OptiFDTD_BandSolver, select File > Load results. The Select 2D Band Solver Result File dialog box appears. Select the *.bnd file that you want to view and click Open. The results are displayed in the OptiFDTD_BandSolver dialog box.

277

LESSON 9FDTD BAND SOLVER

Notes:

278

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Lesson 10 - Lorentz_Drude model for metal and surface plasma simulation

OptiFDTD versions 2 through 4 provided a Drude model and a separate Lorentz model for metal, plasma and dispersive material simulation. The two models work only for 2-dimensional (2D) layouts. Based on feedback from our customers, OptiFDTD 5.0 introduced a combined model called the Lorentz-Drude model. This model can handle both the Drude and Lorentz dispersive effects and works for both 2D and 3D simulations.

The Lorentz-Drude model is intended for use with Noble Metals and Surface Plasma in the optical band. This new material model provides more accurate results than the older Drude model and Lorentz model. Note: It is recommended that you read the section in the Technical Background describing the Lorentz-Drude model equation. OptiFDTD also provides a sample for this Lorentz- Drude model simulation. The following explanation uses this sample file as an example. The corresponding layout file is available in the OptiFDTD set up CD: Sample29_2D_TE_Lorentz_Drude_Model_Ag_ Filter.FDT. The corresponding results file is available on the OptiFDTD setup CD: Sample29_2D_TE_Lorentz_Drude_Model_Ag_ Filter.fda.

In this lesson we will use a 2D project to demonstrate the Lorentz-Drude model material definition and the corresponding simulation. A 3D project can use the same basic techniques described in this lesson, but using a 3D layout instead of a 2D layout.

The layout we are going to simulate is shown in Figure 1. It is an aluminum-grating layout with air as the background material. Because the input wave is plane wave and it is a periodic structure, we can use just one periodic unit cell for the simulation. The step-by-step method for this is the basis of this tutorial.

279

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 1 Design of the layout to be simulated

Creating a project with Lorentz-Drude material Step 1 2 3 4 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, from the File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Click the Profiles And Materials button. The Waveguide Profile Designer appears. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 of the Profile Designer, under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder, and select New.The FDTDDielectric1 material definition dialog box appears. In the FDTD Dielectric1 material definition dialog box, select LorentzDrude Dispersive option. The Lorentz-Drude material data-entry tab appears (see Figure 2).

280

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 2

Lorentz-Drude Dispersive Material dialog box

In the Lorentz-Drude material definition dialog box, define following parameters Name: Lorentz_Drude_Al Select: User Frequency radio button Check: Isotropic checkbox

( F / m) :
Resonance: Resonance 1 2 3 4 5 S 0.523 0.227 0.050 0.166 0.030 P(rad/s) 2.2758e16 2.2758e16 2.2758e16 2.2758e16 2.2758e16

1.0 5 R (rad/s) 0.0 2.461e14 2.346e15 2.747e15 5.276e15 D (rad/s) 7.140e13 5.059e14 4.740e14 2.053e15 5.138e15

281

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Where: S P (rad/s) R (rad/s) D (rad/s) - Strength of the corresponding resonance terms - Plasma frequency - Resonant frequency - Collision frequency (or damping factor )

Note: Enhancement In the above parameter set up, if we only set one term, and set resonant frequency as zero, we will simulate a Drude model material 7 Click Store to save the defined material The Lorentz_Drude_Al will be listed in the FDTD-Dielectric folder of the Waveguide Profile Designer In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 Profile folder, right-click the Channel folder, and select New. The ChannelPro1 will be created and its data entry dialog box will appear. In the ChannelPro1 dialog box, set Profile Name to ChannelPro1_Al and 2D ProfileMaterial to Lorentz_Drude_Al Save the profile. Close the Profile designer Refer to the Technical Background description when you first start preparing metal simulations. Parameters of aluminum are located in the appendix of Technical Background

9 10 11

Designing the waveguides

Step 1 Action In the Initial Properties dialog box, set the following parameters: Waveguide Properties Width: Profile: Wafer dimension Length: 1.0 [mm] 0.135 [mm] ChannelPro1_Al

282

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Width: 2D Wafer Material: 2

0.54 [mm] Air

Click OK to start the Layout Designer. The OptiFDTD designer window appears. Click Zoom ( +) to enlarge the layout From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. Draw the waveguide in the layout at desired the position. The waveguide appears in the layout. Note: Click the Select tool after drawing the waveguide. Double click the waveguide to edit the waveguide position and properties. The Linear Waveguide properties dialog box appears. Set the following parameters: Waveguide start position (offset) Horizontal: Vertical: Waveguide end position Horizontal: Vertical: Width: Depth: Profile: 0.625 0.2025 0.135 0.0 ChannelPro1_Al 0.225 0.2025

3 4

5 6

Select Use Default checkbox for channel thickness tapering

Design another linear waveguide with following parameters: Waveguide start position (offset) Horizontal: Vertical: Waveguide end position Horizontal: Vertical: Width: Depth: Profile: 0.625 -0.2025 0.135 0.0 ChannelPro1_Al 0.225 -0.2025

Select Use Default checkbox for channel thickness tapering.

283

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

The layout will look as presented in Figure 2.

Figure 3 Waveguide in the layout

Setting the Input Plane

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane. Insert the Input Plane into the layout at the desired position. A red line representing the input plane appears in the layout window. Double-click the Input Plane. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears.

284

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

4 5 6

Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave radio button Set the center wavelength to 0.55um. Click Gaussian Modulated CW button, and set the following parameters Time offset (sec): Half Width (sec): 1.0e-14 1.0e-15

Note: This step set the time domain input as pulse 7 8 Click the General tab, and then click Rectangular radio button. Click the 2D Transverse tab to Set the plane wave properties Center Position: Half Width: Tilting Angle: 0.0 0.27 0.0

Effective Refractive Index: Local Input Amplitude or Power: 1.0 9 10 Click the General tab, set Plane Geometry Position to 0.125 and select Positive direction. Click OK to close the input plane properties dialog box

Setting the observation line

The observation line is only used for 2D simulations. It is used to show Field distribution along the line for the user input wavelength Calculate the outgoing power in the line for user input wavelength Calculate the absolute power spectrum and normalized transmittance power spectrum (to the input power) Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Vertical Line. Place the Observation Line in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation line. The Observation Properties -- Vertical Line dialog box appears. The General tab settings: In Center, Offset, type (select) the following: Horizontal: 0.9 mm

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6

285

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Vertical: X length: Label: 7 8

0.0 mm 0.54mm ObservationLine1

On the Data Components tab, select the following: 2D TE: Click OK. Ey, Hx, Hz

Setting up 2D Simulation parameters

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D Simulation Parameters. The Simulation Parameters dialog box appears Select TE polarization option. Set x-direction mesh and z-direction mesh to 0.005. Click Advanced. Set the Anisotropic PML boundary condition parameters: +x: -x: +z: -z: PMC PMC Anisotropic PML Anisotropic PML 25 1.0e-12 5.0 3.5

Number of Anisotropic PML layers: Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: Power of Grading Polynomial:

Note: The x- edge is set as PMC because we perform the simulations on a periodic cell and use the plane wave excitation. It works like a symmetric boundary. Please refer to the Technical Background for Plane wave simulation

286

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

6 7 8

Click Calculate to get the Time Step Size. Set Run for 6000 time steps for finalization. From the Key Input Plane drop-down list, select Input Plane1 and Wavelength equal to 0.55 Note: The Key Input Plane's Center Wavelength will be used for the DFT calculation.

Click OK to close the Simulation Parameters dialog box without running the simulation, or click Run to start the OptiFDTD Simulator.

287

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Performing the simulation

When the Simulator starts, the propagation field can be observed as presented in Figure 4.
Figure 4 Dynamic field pattern in OptiFDTD simulator

Performing data analysis

After the simulations are completed, you can open the analyzer to do the postsimulation analysis. The tools for post-processing data analysis are already discussed in other lessons. In this lesson we will demonstrate usage of an observation line to extract the transmittance.

288

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Step 1 2

Action In the OptiFDTD analyzer, select Observation Area Analysis in the tools menu Click Observation Line button. Observation line page appears. This page can show the field pattern in observation line for user specified wavelength Click Power Spectrum button, and set the following parameters to extract the power transmittance. Minimum wavelength: Maximum wavelength: Sample point: Normalized with: 0.4 [mm] 1.1 [mm] 71 Input Plane1

Click Calculate button to start transmittance calculation. The results will be shown in the graph. (see Figure 5) Note: It will take a while for this calculation to complete, because DFT is calculated for each field component of each point in the line

289

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

Figure 5 Power normalization (Transmittance)

Discussion: This lesson utilizes 2D layout to demonstrate usage of Lorentz-Drude materials in OptiFDTD simulations. Materials in this layout can be switched to perfect conductor or other metals to observe their interaction with the optical field 3D simulation for Lorentz-Drude material has the same concept as 2D simulation. However, if Lorentz-Drude material in 3D layout touches the boundary, the corresponding Anisotropic PML will use the air instead. This approach has been chosen, since calculations for Lorentz-Drude material in Anisotropic PML consume too much time and memory. Lorentz-Drude material needs very fine mesh. In general the mesh size should be at least 2 percent of the smallest simulated wavelength. A large mesh size will render the FDTD method algorithm unstable. The FDTD scheme for coarse mesh is unable to properly represent quick changes in signal attenuation within a few mesh points.

290

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

NOTES:

291

LESSON 10 - LORENTZ_DRUDE MODEL FOR METAL AND SURFACE PLASMA SIMULATION

292

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Lesson 11 - Analyzing 1D Photonic Crystals (Bragg gratings)

Introduction
The simplest photonic crystal consists of alternating layers of material with different dielectric constants. Such multilayer structures have been widely studied and are frequently referred to as Bragg gratings. In this tutorial we design simple Bragg Grating that consists of alternating layers with permittivity contrast 1/13 as discussed and analyzed in [1]. We will show how to use PWE band solver to analyze cases of both normal and oblique incidence, while pointing out other features of the software, namely output normalization and inversion symmetry.

The tutorial is structured as follows 1 2 3 4 5 Define the Lattice Structurer PWE Band Solver Parameters Run Simulation and View Results Bragg grating with layers of different width Off-axis propagation

Define the Lattice Structure

Note: For the details on how a lattice can be created, please refer to Lesson 3 Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation and Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver. For the details on how material and waveguide profile can be created, please refer to Lessons 1 through to Lesson 9.

We start investigating system of equally thick alternating layers with dielectric constants e1=13 and later on we will change layer thickness ratio. Open a new project. Create new materials named eps13 with constant isotropic refractive index of 3.6056. Material Air is a default material in OptiFDTD and will be used in this 2 project. Here we use the relationship between refractive index and permittivity = n . We will also need a channel profile with permittivity eps13. Create a new channel profile named chan_eps13 and specify its 2D refractive index as eps13. In this tutorial we will not use 3D profile definition.

293

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

It is a good practice to parameterize the layout design so that later modifications can be done in a fast and flexible way. We will first create several variables, which will represent some of the physical properties of the design.

Table 1:

lngth wdth offset scale a

10 10 0.0 1.0 0.5

Layout lenght Layout width Horizontal offset of the unit cell elements fromthe lattice point (important in case of exploiting inversion symmetry). Scale factor - scales grating dimensions. ac will define width of a Bragg layer (c is lattice vector).
Note: To define the variable, please input the variable name in the Initial Properties dialog box. Click OK to access the Variables and Function dialog box to define the values.

Finish the initial steps by defining wafer, cladding and default waveguides as follows: Default profile: chan_eps13 Waveguide width: wdth Wafer dimensions: lngth / wdth 2D Wafer: Air

Save the project under a new name.

There are several ways how to create a Bragg grating structure. You can create the structure by placing individual waveguides on the layout one by one, using script or lattice generator. We use the lattice generator to create 1D lattice with alternating layers represented by simple linear waveguides surrounded by air. In the layout designer create a new PBG Crystal structure, double click on it to open the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box. Use the default 2D rectangular lattice and specify the Lattice dimensions #A=1 and #C=8. This will create 1D lattice with 8 unit cells along C vector direction. Center the lattice on the layout by setting the origin as (2, 0) (horizontal, vertical). See Figure 1

294

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Figure 1

Crystal lattice Properties dialog box

Add new linear waveguide atom to the unit cell. Now you need to edit the properties of the linear waveguide. As the atom uses absolute coordinates we have to use our scale variable to preserve scalability of the design. Set the linear waveguide position. (See Figure 2)

295

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Figure 2 Atom---Linear Waveguide Properties Dialog box

Start horizontal: scale*offset Start vertical: 0.0 End horizontal: scale*(offset+a) End vertical: 0.0

Select chan_eps13 profile. Get back to the layout designer. Put vertical input plane in the z-position of 1.0um. Check the layout and refractive index visually. Persuade yourself that the design will scale when you change the scale factor scale. You can also experiment with the filling factor a. To view the refractive index you need to enter an input plane to the design.

296

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Figure 3 Layout design (left) and refractive index view (right)

When you are finished experimenting make sure that a=0.5 and scale=1.0. To get final band diagrams in the same form as in the [1] we chose the lattice constant to be 1.

297

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

PWE Band Solver Parameters

Open PWE Parameters dialog box (Simulation->PWE Band Solver Parameters)
Figure 4 PWE parameters dialog box

Unless stated otherwise use default values. In the Solver group select 1D, TE Polarization. Domain parameter group gives you the option to modify the lattice vectors, mesh size as well as simulation center. Select Use defaults in Lattice Vectors group. The band solver in 1D assumes a periodicity in z-direction; only the zcomponent of c vector can be changed. In solver 1D option the periodicity lattice vector is (0,0,z) where z-can be define by user or is setup as z-projection of the lattice vector C. Band solver automatically sets a and b vectors to (1,0,0) and (0,1,0) automatically. Notice that using defaults for the lattice vector you are not allowed editing them unless you uncheck the default check box.

298

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

In the Mesh group increase the number of #Steps c to 64 and leave the domain origin set to defaults, i.e. (0,0,0). Domain origin is the origin of the numerical domain expressed in terms of the lattice vectors A, B, and C.

Origin = O lattice + AA + BB + CC

By default the domain origin coincides with the origin of the lattice.

To perform band calculations we need to have a defined K-vector path. By default the k-path is not specified. Select User defined from pull-down menu in the K-vector Path group. Add two new major k-vectors by right clicking on the k-path table and selecting Add twice. Edit the vectors so that they lie on the opposite boundaries of the 1D Brillouin zone. As the k-path is specified in terms of reciprocal lattice vectors, the two vectors are (0,0,-0.5) and (0,0,0.5). Number of division determines overall number of the k-vectors along the path. The first vector has number of division automatically set up to 1, since there is no vector in the k-path preceding it. Set number of division next to the second major vector to 10 to generate path containing 11 k-vectors.

299

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Run Simulation and View Results

When finished with editing band solver parameters click Run to start the simulations. A simulation window will be launched and simulation starts. You will be notified in the in the output window at the bottom (Notification tab) about progress of the simulations. After the simulation is finished the graph is populated with set of eigenfrequencies of individual k-vectors. By default no processing is applied to the output data and the normalized frequencies are displayed as an unconnected set of points.
Figure 5 Band structure of the Bragg grating with layers of equal thickness 0.5mm (permittivity 13.0/1.0)

Use the Connect button on the Diagram toolbar to connect the eigenfrequencies of individual bands to get clearer picture of the band diagram. On occasions the current version of the engine will calculate the eigenvalues not in an exact order, in which case the connect button will produce incorrect band diagram. You can zoom on the diagram by right clicking and selecting the zoom tool. To identify the band gaps, if present, use the Locate band gaps button on the Diagram toolbar. It is possible to set a tolerance for the bandgaps detection in the adjacent input field. By default the tolerance is set to 0.01. Setting a high tolerance you can get rid of the highlighted band gaps.

300

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Bragg grating with layers of different width

Thanks to the parameterized design we can easily verify other published results as well as point out other features of PWE band solver. Lets change a variable to 0.2 to simulate grating with alternating layers of different widths. The layer of the high permittivity (waveguides) will be 0.2a thick, whereas the air layer will be 0.8a thick (for scale=1). Below you see the resulting band structure as reported in reference [1].
Figure 6 Band structure of the Bragg grating with dielectric layers of thickness 0.2 mm (period =1mm, permittivity 13.0/1.0).

The calculated eigenfrequencies are plotted in a normalized fashion as,

frequency = -------2c

in units [1/mm], which is not the same as usually reported results in a non-dimensional form ( --------- ). To get the non-dimensional results, you need to scale the results by a
a 2c

301

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

lattice constant in microns. As we have chosen the lattice constant to be scale*|c|=1.0micron, our results look the same as published ones. Lets now scale the design so that the lattice constant is equal to 2microns by setting the variable scale to 2.0. Run the simulation again, detect the band gaps and compare the values. The first gap is now (0.1604, 0.3068) compared to the original (0.203, 0.453). The normalized frequency can be readily transform into a wavelength in microns as

1 = ------------------------frequency

which means that the first band in our original simulation lies between 3.898and 6.631 microns.

Off-axis propagation
In the previous examples we intentionally selected propagation direction (k-vector) normal to the multilayer structures. Changing the polarization from TE to TM we are getting the same results, which confirm that the TE/TM modes are degenerate. In case of an off-axis propagation the k-vector has a component parallel to the Bragg layers, and the degeneracy of TM/TE modes is lifted. The band solver allows you to investigate cases of off-axis incidence. This can be achieved by an appropriate k-path definition. We will be considering propagation along G2 reciprocal lattice vector, i.e. k=(0, k2, 0). As the ordering of the lattice vectors in the band solver is (c, a, b) due to the layout designer G2 vector in this sample will correspond to x-direction (see 2D FDTD Band Solver).

First save the current k-path in a file so that you can easily reload the path again later on. Click on Save File and in the SaveAs dialog box input the name, e.g. BraggZ. Next redefine the k-path by adding one more major k-point and editing the k-path in the following manner: k1=( 0.0, 0.0,-0.5), div=1 k2=( 0.0, 0.0, 0.0), div=5 k3=( 0.0, 1.5, 0.0), div=15

Thus the first part of the k-path from k1 to k2 will be the same as in the previous simulations but path from k2 to k3 will refer to propagation in y-direction (direction of the G2 reciprocal vector), parallel to the dielectric layers. The results of the simulations run for TE and TM polarizations are shown below.

302

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

Figure 7 Band structure of the Bragg grating for TE (left) and TM (right) polarizations. The first part of each diagram (indices 0-5) depicts on-axez propagation, where the TE and TM modes are degenerate (the same diagram) and band gaps are present. The right part of the diagrams (k-vector indices 5-20) shows lift od degeneracy and splitting of the TE/TM bands.

TE/TM solustions can also be described in the fashion of referecence [1] as solutions with electric field bector in x-direction in case of TE and electric in yz plane in case of TM.

References:
[1] Joannopoulos, J.D., Meade, R.D., Winn, J.N., Photonic Cystals, Molding the flow of light, Princeton University Press 1995

303

LESSON 11 - ANALYZING 1D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS (BRAGG GRATINGS)

304

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Lesson 12 - Analyzing 2D Photonic Crystals

Introduction
The tutorial demonstrates analysis of 2D photonic crystal using PWE Band solver. First we create a lattice model of dielectric cylinders (permittivity=8.9) suspended in air. We then proceed with a simple simulation on a predefined k-vector path and result analysis. Finally we discuss the meaning of the Domain Origin in the PWE dialog box. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Create layout of the 2D rectangular photonic crystal lattice Set Parameters of PWE Band Solver Simulation Run and Results Analysis Using Inversion Symmetry and Domain Origin 2D Hexagonal lattice Band solving of rotated lattices

1. Create a 2D rectangular lattice of dielectric cylinders Note: For the details on how a lattice can be created, please refer to Lesson 3 Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation and Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver. For the details on how material and waveguide profile can be created, please refer to lesson 1 to lesson 9 To define the variable, please input the variable name in the Initial Properties dialog box. Click OK to access the Variables and Function dialog box to define the values. We are going analyze 2D photonic crystals with rectangular and hexagonal lattices as reported in reference [1]. Start defining necessary materials and channel profiles in the Profile Designer. Two tables below show the materials and channels needed for the project, next to proposed names and lattice, in which they are used. For the following exercise we will employ only 2D materials and channels.

305

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Table 1
Material Name eps8_9 eps1_0 eps13_0 2D Permittivity/regractive index [-} 8.9 /2.983287 1.0 /1.0 13.0 /3.605551 Used in 2D rectangular lattice 2D rectangular & hexagonal lattice 2D hexagonal lattice

Table 2
Channel Name Chan_eps8_9 Chan_eps1 2D Material [-] eps8_9 eps1_0 Used in 2d rectangular lattice 2D hexagonal lattice

After creating the materials and channels specify the dimensions of the wafer as 10x10microns and wafer material as eps1_0 (air). Create a 2D rectangular lattice of dielectric cylinders with permittivity 8.9 suspended in air, with radius of 0.2a where a is the lattice constant of the square lattice.

On the waveguide toolbar select the PBG Crystal Structure and click on the layout. Open the lattice properties by double clicking on the empty lattice structure. In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box set the Origin as (1,-4), in Lattice Properties select Type as 2D Rectangular and set both #A and #C to 8. We will build the lattice parameterized so that it is easy to change physical dimensions later on. Define a variable called a and set it to 1. It will be our lattice constant. You can do so either from the Crystal Lattice Propeties box by clicking any field which contains fx symbol or from the designer (Simulation >> Edit Parameters). As the basis vectors are in unit length by default, by setting Scale in Lattice Dimensions group to a the lattice constant of the lattice is expressed by scale in microns.

In Atom Waveguides in Unit Cells group add new elliptical waveguide with major and minor radius set to 0.2a and profile Chan8_9. Now the lattice is defined.

To test the parametrized lattice go to Simulation->Edit Parameters and change a variable value to e.g. 1.5, click ok and you will see that the whole lattice has the lattice constant of 1.5, and cylinders have radius of 0.2a. Set scale to its original value 1.0.

306

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

2. PWE Band Solver Parameters Open PWE Parameters dialog box (Simulation->PWE Band Solver Parameters). By default the PWE solver should be set to 2D Solver, TE polarization, no inversion symmetry. The Lattice vectors should use defaults, i.e. the mesh (#Steps a, #Steps c) should be set to 16x16. Also make sure the Domain origin is set to (0,0,0). Set number of bands to 6 and tolerance to 10-6 for best results.

Now you have to define only the k-vector path. In case of a square 2D lattice with atoms having at least the same symmetry as the lattice you can use the predefined SquareZX path from the pull down menu in K-vector Path group. This is a standard Reducible Brillouin zone of a square lattice as shown in technical background. The default path, defined in terms of reciprocal lattice vectors, automatically populates the K-vector path table. The path is defined by set of major k-points and associated number of division along the path from one major vector to another
Figure 1 PWE Band Solver Parameters Dialog Box

307

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

3. Simulation Results When finished with editing band solver parameters click Run to start the simulations. A simulation windows will be launched and simulation starts. You will be notified in the in the Notification tab window at the bottom about progress of the simulations. The engine first reports on the permittivity averaging process, then on the progress of calculations for individual k-vectors and finally informs you when the simulation is finished. At the end of the simulation the graph is populated with set of eigenfrequencies of individual k-vectors. You can use the Connect button on the Diagram toolbar to connect the eigenfrequencies of individual bands as in the 1D case. You can also identify band gaps if there are any. To get band structure for TM modes you have to run the simulation again with TM polarization setting. It is always possible to run with hybrid polarization setting. In this case both TE and TM modes are displayed but the band solver cannot distinguish the modes.
Figure 2 Band Diagram from PWE Band Solver

You can compare the calculated band diagrams with the results in reference [1].

308

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Inversion Symmetry and Domain Origin In case the simulated unit cell or supercell structure has inversion symmetry the operator matrix in the eigenvalue problem becomes a real symmetric matrix. This can be used to achieve significant savings in storage and as well as speed improvement. The inversion symmetry in the design is not detected automatically but user can notify the solver about its presence by checking the Inversion Symmetry check box. To obtain correct results,however, the unit cell (or supercell) has to have the inversion symmetry around the Domain Origin. The Domain Origin is specified in terms of the original lattice vectors ( A, B, C ) and the lattice origin : O lattice
DomainOrigin = Olattice + AA + BB + CC

It has great importance when one wants to use inversion symmetry option as well when a defect supercell is simulated. Figure 3 below shows the simulation domain of a unit cell for Domain Origin (2,0,1) and (0.5,0,2.5). Notice that the refractive index for the simulation is obtained from different parts of the layout. For the current sample we can leave the domain origin as (0,0,0) knowing that the unit cell has inversion symmetry. Check the Inversion Symmetry check box and run the simulation again (either TE, TM or both). Notice the simulation time improvement. You can deduce the simulation time from the Notification tab messages. What is going to happen if the simulation domain does not have an inversion symmetry? In such case the results will be incorrect. The solver simply samples the refractive index only on half of the domain assuming the second half is defined by the inversion symmetry. Set the Domain Origin to (3.2,0,3.2). Clearly Domain selected does not have an inversion symmetry (see figure below) and the results are incorrect. On the other hand the Domain Origin can be selected as (0.5,0,2.5) and possess the inversion symmetry again (green unit cell).

309

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 3 Inversion Symmetry and Domain Origin

It should be now clear that for simulations of unit cell it would be sufficient to have lattice structure of dimensions 1x1. The Domain Origin becomes also important in defining the supercells containing defects as for example a PC fiber or linear defects (waveguides). 2D hexagonal lattice We are now going to verify band structure of 2D hexagonal lattice as reported in reference [1]. At this point you might want to save the current file under different name. The photonic structure we want to analyze consists of a hexagonal pattern of air holes in dielectric with permittivity 13. We have defined all the necessary materials and profiles at the beginning of this tutorial so the transition is easy. To change the layout double click on the lattice to open Crystal Lattice Properties dialog. Change the lattice type from 2D Rectangular to 2D Hexagonal. Then Edit the properties of the elliptic waveguides (lattice atom waveguide). Change the minor and major radius from 0.2a to 0.48a and the profile to Chan_eps1. The last thing is to change the substrate from air to dielectric material eps13 (Edit >> Wafer Properties >> 2D Wafer Properties) and check the index distribution in the 2D Refractive Index View.

310

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Before running simulation we want to change the Simulation parameters of the PWE band solver, to get desired polarization, number of bands, and mainly to set up correct k-path.

In the PWE Parameters dialog uncheck the Inversion Symmetry, select TE polarization, use defaults for lattice vectors and mesh (16x16). Make sure the Domain Origin is set to (0,0,0). Set Number of Bands to 6 and tolerance to 10-5. In the Kvector Path select the predefined HexagonalZX option. The definition of the Brillouin zone can be found in the Technical Background.

Run the simulation to obtain the results for TE and TM. Keep the results for further comparison. Now increase the mesh resolution to 32x32. Also notice that the structure has an inversion symmetry so you might check the Inversion symmetry check box. Run the simulation with new parameters and compare the results with the first simulations. Even though the structures might look similar you will notice a difference in band gaps. This is due to the rough discretization, which cannot make details of the layouts. The air occupies most of the unit cell with filling factor of 0.836.

311

LESSON 12 - ANALYZING 2D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 4 Band Diagram for Hexagonal Lattice

Rotated 2D lattice Occasionally you might use a lattice to build a more complicated 2D layout design. In such design the lattice might also be rotated. You do not have to create a new layout to analyze the lattice. Use the Default Lattice Vectors and Domain Origin to set the computational domain and to capture the correct periodicity. As an example rotate the 2D hexagonal lattice above by 10 degrees. Double click the lattice and in Lattice properties dialog box set the Azimuth angle to 10 degrees. Close the dialog box and open PWE Simulation Parameters dialog. Make sure you have selected defaults for the lattice vectors and Run. The band diagrams should be the same.

References:
[1] Joannopoulos, J.D., Meade, R.D., Winn, J.N., Photonic Crystals, Molding the flow of light, Princeton University Press 1995

312

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Lesson 13 - Analyzing 3D Photonic Crystals

Introduction
Most of the features of PWE band solver were demonstrated in Lessons 11 and 12. In this tutorial we apply the solver to a 3D problem of a fcc (face centered cubic) and diamond lattices of spherical air balls suspended in a dielectric medium. Such structures have been intensively studied in the past [2]. The fcc structure is known to lack a full photonic bandgap, whereas the diamond lattice, as first reported by Ho, Chan and Soukoulis in 1990, have a complete photonic band gap.

1. FCC Lattice of Air Spheres Suspended in Dielectric Create the Structure in Layout Designer Set Parameters of PWE Band Solver Run Simulation and Analyze Results

2. Diamond Lattice of Air Spheres Suspended in Dielectric Design the Lattice Structure Set Parameters and Run Simulation

1. FCC lattices of Air Spheres in Dielectric

1.1 Create a 3D rectangular lattice of dielectric spheres Note: In this lesson, it is assumed that you already read the PWE tutorial Lesson 11 - Analyzing 1D Photonic Crystals (Bragg gratings) and Lesson 12 - Analyzing 2D Photonic Crystals. For the details on how a lattice can be created, please refer to Lesson 3 Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation and Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver. For the details on how material and waveguide profile can be created, please refer to tutorial Lessons 1 through to Lesson 9.

313

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

To define the variable, please input the variable name in the Initial Properties dialog box. Click OK to access the Variables and Function dialog box to define the values.

When a project is initialized, in the profile designer, please define two constant materials with name as Air and eps13, and the refractive index as 1.0 and 3.6055 respectively. . As the air is already predefined as a default material we only need to create one new material with refractive index of ~3.6055. Please also define a channel default profile use Air or eps13. OptiFDTD layout designer requires this default even though you will not need it to build the photonic crystal.

In the project initial properties dialog box, Please define wafer dimensions as 5x5 microns, cladding material as eps13 and thickness 3 micron, substrate material eps13 and thickness 1micron.

In the layout designer click on the PBG Crystal Structure icon and place a lattice structure on a layout. Open Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box and specify Lattice Type as FFC. The lattice vectors will be automatically generated. Make sure the scale is set to 1.0 and number of lattice vector translations is set as (#A,#B,#C)=(3,3,3). (See Figure 1)

314

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 1 Crystal lattice Properties dialog box.

Enter new 3Dsphere object in the Atom Waveguides in Unit Cell. Edit the properties of the Sphere objects by setting the radius of 0.3716 and its material to Air. Return to the layout designer. Check the refractive index in the refractive index viewer and persuade yourself you created FCC lattice of air spheres submerge in dielectric.

1.2 Set simulation parameters Open the PWE Simulation Parameters dialog box and set 3D solver. Hybrid polarization option will be automatically selected. The current version does not allow applying any symmetry constraints in 3D simulations. As our lattice vectors in case of FCC lattice are not standard FCC lattice vector, we want to set the lattice vectors for PWE simulation manually so that they correspond to the standard way. Uncheck the Use Defaults and set vectors as

315

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

a=(0.5, 0.0, 0.5) b=(0.5, 0.5, 0.0) c=(0.0, 0.5, 0.5) In this simulation use the mesh resolution as 16x16x16. To increase accuracy you might want to increase the mesh size later. The simulation time will significantly increase.

Next step is to define the k-path in terms of the reciprocal vectors. In this case we want to scan the irreducible first Brillouin zone. The definition of the points of higher symmetry will define the zone can be found elsewhere. The symmetry point, we will define are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Schematic of the first Brillouin zone of FCC lattice (truncated octahedron) with high symmetry points (left) and defined k-path across the irreducible Brillouin zone (right).

To edit the k- path, Please chose the User defined in the K-Vector Path list, then right click on the k-path area, and select Add to edit the terminal point or stop point for a k-vector path. Figure 3 shows the PWE simulation parameter dialog box.

316

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 3 PWE simulation parameters dialog box

Add an input wave plane in the layout, and then you can perform the PWE band solver simulation. The resulting band structure does not contain any complete band gap. Similar results can be found for example in reference [1][2]. (See Figure 4).

317

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 4 Hybrid band structure of FCC lattice (mesh16*16*16)

2. Diamond Lattice of Air Spheres in Dielectric

2.2 Layout design of the diamond lattice The fcc lattice of air balls in dielectric was not found to posses band gaps. However, it has been shown that in case of diamond lattice band gap structure can be detected. The diamond lattice is composed of two interpenetrating fcc lattices, one displaced of a lattice constant in each direction from the other. We can easily create such structure in the layout designer by simply adding another fcc lattice.

Save the file under different name to keep the original fcc lattice design. Double click on the fcc layout, the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box presents. In the Atom

318

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Waveguides in Unit Cell region, select True 3D Sphere Waveguide and click new will start to add another atom in the existing fcc layout. Please shift this new atom position by in all the (x, y, z) direction. Set the two Sphere atoms radius as 0.325. Check the refractive index and persuade yourself this is indeed a diamond lattice. As reported in [1] the band gap should be maximized for sphere radius of 0.325.

2.2 Set parameters and run simulation Keep the PWE band solver simulation parameter setting from the previous example, and run the simulation The obtained band structure of the diamond lattice clearly has a complete band gap. Click on the Locate Band Gap button on Diagram toolbar to find details on the band gap: (0.4954, 0.6656), gap=0.170.

319

LESSON 13 - ANALYZING 3D PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 5 Hybrid band structure of diamond lattice (mesh16*16*16)

References:
[1] [2] Joannopoulos, J.D., Meade, R.D., Winn, J.N., Photonic Crystals, Molding the flow of light, Princeton University Press 1995 Ho, K.M., Chan, C.T., Soukolis, C.M., Existence of photonic gaps in periodic dielectric structures, Phys.Rev.Lett. 65, p3152.

320

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Lesson 14 - Analyzing 2D Defects in Photonic Crystals

Introduction
In the previous tutorials we were interested in finding band gaps of 1D, 2D and 3D photonic crystal structures. No modes are allowed with frequencies inside the gap. By perturbing a lattice at a single site we may permit an existence of a localized pointdefect mode or set of such modes that have frequencies within the gap. We will show how to detect and view such defects in 2D photonic crystals in this tutorial.

Note: In this lesson, it is presumed that you already read the PWE Tutorials 1 to 3. For the details on how a lattice can be created, please refer to Lesson 3 Photonic crystal and photonic band gap simulation and Lesson 9FDTD Band Solver. For the details on how material and waveguide profile can be created, please refer to Lesson 1 through to Lesson 9. To define the variable, please input the variable name in the Initial Properties dialog box. Click OK to access the Variables and Function dialog box to define the values.

1. Square 2D lattice
1.1 Setting and Simulating Supercell The rectangular lattice of dielectric rods with permittivity 8.9 suspended in air was investigated earlier in Lesson 2Input wave setup. We found that the TE solutions (Optiwave convention) exhibit a band gap in the range between 0.324 and 0.442. First we have a look what is going to happen if we increase the simulation domain so that it contains several unit cells. Change the supercell definition to (#a,#b,#c)=(1,1,2) and mesh to 16x16x32. Run a TE simulation again. Notice that the band diagram looks very much different than in the case of 1x1x1 supercell (See Figure 1a). A band gap can be still located but this time it is wider and spans from 0.291 to 0.442. Change the supercell again to (2,1,2) and mesh to 32x16x32 and run simulation again. This time the band structure is again totally different (See Figure 1b). Nevertheless, the band

321

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

gap in the last simulation is correct. The important fact to notice is so called folding of the bands. For (1,2) supercell there are two bands below the band gap, and in case of (2,2) supercell there are four bands. This is due to the fact that the new domain contains 2 and 4 elementary unit cell within the supercell.

Figure 1 Band diagram of a supercell 1x2 (left) and supercell 2x2 (right) for k-path selected along the irreducible Brillouins zone for square lattice (SquareZX: G-X-M-G).

By creating a (1,2) supercell we broke up the 4-fold symmetry of the original square cell and what used to be an irreducible Brillouin zone in case of square lattice is only a part of a new irreducible zone in case of rectangular supercell. To get a correct band gap we need to scan along the edges of the irreducible Brillouin zone. Add two new major k-points to the k-path: X2=(0.5, 0.0, 0.0) 10 divisions M =(0.5, 0.0, 0.5) 10 divisions Run the simulation for (1,2) supercell. You will again observe the band folding and this time you will get correct band gap in agreement with our original simulation.

322

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 2 Band diagram of the supercell 1x2 for k-path along the edges of irreducible Brillouins zone for rectangular lattice (G-X-M-G-X2-M)

1.2 Setting up a defect Changing the size or refractive index of a selected atom on the lattice can create a defect in the lattice. We will investigate a defect created by a missing dielectric rod. First please set the cell number to 9X9 on the original layout, then we need to remove the element from the lattice. Select the lattice in the layout, the PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool becomes highlighted in the Tools toolbar. Select it, then right click on the unit cell (5,5) and select Cells Off. The cylinder in the center of the lattice will be turned off. You can check this in 2D refractive index view (see Figure 3).

323

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 3 Layout (left) and refractive index (right) of a square lattice with missing dielectric rod (defect). Supercells 5x5 and 6x6 are shown with domain origins.

What is going to happen if we run a simulation on a supercell domain with the defect? If there is a localized defect mode confined close to the defect we should see a straight band within the band gap of the unperturbed square lattice, i.e. in the interval (0.324, 0.442). If the simulation domain is small and the localized mode extends to the simulation boundaries there is coupling between the adjacent defect on the supercell lattice and its result will be a defect band within the original band gap. Thus when simulation defects we need to insure that the simulation domain is large enough so that the localized band if it exist is narrow within our tolerance. The following simulation of the whole k-path is often not necessary to study point defects. A single k-vector simulation will usually suffice. It is however illustrative. We will perform simulation on a supercell 5x5 so that we can observe the localized state. We have already created the defect on the layout. Now we have to set the simulation Domain Origin. In the figure above you can see two rectangular regions marked by different colors. The inner region defines a suitable 5x5 supercell, the outer rectangle 6x6 supercell. Notice that a supercell selected in such manner possesses an inversion symmetry, which we can use to speed up simulations. The picture also shows the domain an origin coordinates. For the 5x5 supercell set the Domain Origin to (1.5, 0.0, 1.5). We need to have a reasonable resolution. Selecting 64x64 mesh will be enough for demonstration. For the supercell of dimensions 5x5 we expect the first band will be folded 25 times and thus we will need more than 26 bands to see the defect if it exist. Select 30 bands. Make sure TE polarization is selected. As we have a square supercell a default SquareZX k-path is selected. Also check the inversion symmetry to speed up calculations. The simulated results are shown in Figure 4.

324

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 4 Band diagram of the rectangular supercell. The defect bands are flat bands within the band gap.

To detect a point defect it is usually enough to run a simulation and ideal lattice, find band gaps and then run simulation for a defect and a single k-vector. The solutions within a band gap will be the modes of interest and by a visual check of the field profiles we can estimate whether the selected supercell domain is large enough.

325

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Next step, we what show how can we get the modal field distribution, in the PWE Band Solver Parameters dialog box, k-path section leave only the gamma point and delete all the other major points. Leave the mesh set to 64x64, TE polarization and set the supercell to 5x5 with Domain origin at (3/2,0,3/2). Set number of bands to 30 to account for the first band folding. Click on the File Export button to open the PWE Data Export dialog box (See Figure 5). Select User selection for K points and in the right input field enter the index for the exported k-vector. In this case we run simulation for single k-vector and as the indexing of the k-vector starts from zero enter 0. In Bands section select User Selection. The first band is going to be folded 5x5=25times, so that index 24 corresponds to the defect. Choose 23, 24, and 25 to export both the defect profiles as well as the profiles of modes below and above the defect. Select all the fields and components for export. Close the dialog box and run simulation.

Figure 5

PWE Data Export dialog box. User specifies k-vectors, bands as well as individual components to be exported.

The exported field pattern is in the sub folder where the current project is saved, you can use our OptiWave 3D viewer to observe these field patterns, and Figure 6 shows simulated results under different condition.

326

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

Figure 6 Localized defect mode of a rectangular lattice of dielectric cylinders (r=0.2, e=8.9) in air. From left to right there are electric field amplitude, magnetic field amplitude of 5x5 supercell and magnetic field amplitude for a supercell 6x6.

References: [3] [4] Joannopoulos, J.D., Meade, R.D., Winn, J.N., Photonic Crystals, Molding the flow of light, Princeton University Press 1995 Ho, K.M., Chan, C.T., Soukolis, C.M., Existence of photonic gaps in periodic dielectric structures, Phys.Rev.Lett. 65, p3152

327

LESSON 14 - ANALYZING 2D DEFECTS IN PHOTONIC CRYSTALS

NOTES:

328

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Lesson 15 - Simulations of Gratings Created with VB Script

Grating layouts in most cases are the periodic structure. There are two ways in OptiFDTD to realized the periodic layout: PBG editor and VB scripting, PBG layout and corresponding simulations are discussed in Lesson 3, Lesson 11 - 14. This lesson will focus the following features: Using VB scripting to generate the grating (or periodic) layout. Grating layout simulation and post-processing analysis

Note: It is assumed that you are familiar with Lesson 1Getting started and with material and profile definition.

Introduce the layout

We are going to simulate a 2D grating layout that is shown in the Figure 1.
Figure 1 Layout

Note: Note: The corresponding project file can also be found in the Sample file folder, Sample37_2D_VB_Script_Grating.FDT

329

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Define a 2D grating layout with VB scripting

Step 1 Action Start a new project from Waveguide Layout Designer by select New in the file menu. Initial Properties dialog box appears 2 In the Initial Properties dialog box set the following parameters Wafer Dimensions Length (mm): 8.5 Width (mm): 3.0 2D wafer properties:

Wafer refractive index: Air

3 4 Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Click Profiles and Materials. In the Profile designer, under the folder OptiFDTD_Designer1, define and store the following dielectric materials. Name: N=1.5 Refractive index (Re:): 1.5 Name: n=3.14 Refractive index (Re:): 3.14 5 In the profile designer, under the folder OptiFDTD_Designer1, define the following channel profiles Name: ChannelPro_n=3.14 2D profile definition, Material: n=3.14

Name: ChannelPro_n=1.5 2D profile definition, Material: n=1.5 6 In the Initial Properties dialog box, Set ChannelPro_n=3.14 as the default profile, and click OK to start the main designer OptiFDTD_Designer windows appears In the OPtiFDTD_Designer window, Draw the following Objects a. Linear waveguide 1 Label: linear1 Start Horizontal offset: 0.0

330

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Start vertical offset:

-0.75

End Horizontal offset: 8.5 End vertical offset: -0.75 Channel Thickness Tapering: Use Default Width: 1.5 Depth: 0.0 Profile: ChannelPro_n=1.5 b. Linear waveguide 2 Label: linear2 Start Horizontal offset: 0.5 Start vertical offset: 0.05 End Horizontal offset: 1.0 End vertical offset: 0.05 Channel Thickness Tapering: Use Default Width: 0.1 Depth: 0.0 Profile: ChannelPro_n=3.14 8 In the In the OPtiFDTD_Designer window, define an horizontal input plane with following properties: Continuous Wave Wavelength: 0.63 General: Input field Transverse: Rectangular X Position: 0.5 Direction: Negative Direction Label: InputPlane1 2D Transverse: Center Position: 4.5 Half width: 5.0 Titlitng Angle: 45 Effective Refractive Index: Local Amplitude: 1.0

331

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Figure 2 OptiFDTD Designer window after Step 8.

Click Layout Script Shortcut tool bar or select Generate Layout Script under the Simulation menu. This step will transform the layout object to the VB scripting code. The software will ask: Generate Layout Script? This will overwrite the current script. Click Yes. The Scripting page appears Click Layout button to go to the Layout window, and delete all the objects in the layout window. Click Test Script shortcut toolbar or select Test Script in the Simulation Menu. This will run the VB script code. Now all the designed objects come back from VB scripting code. The layout should look like figure 2 (This steps shows that the layout can be designed by VB script) Click Scripting button to go to the scripting page. Modify the Linear2 code paragraph as the following: Dim Linear2 for m=1 to 8 Set Linear2 = WGMgr.CreateObj ( "WGLinear", "Linear2"+Cstr(m) ) Linear2.SetPosition 0.5+(m-1)*1.0, 0.05, 1+(m-1)*1.0, 0.05 Linear2.SetAttr "WidthExpr", "0.1" Linear2.SetAttr "Depth", "0" Linear2.SetAttr "StartThickness", "0.000000" Linear2.SetAttr "EndThickness", "0.000000" Linear2.SetProfileName "ChannelPro_n=3.14" Linear2.SetDefaultThicknessTaperMode True

10 11

12

332

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

13

Click Test Script shortcut toolbar to run the Modified VB script code. The grating layout is generated, the layout is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3 Grating layout generated by VB scripting after Step 13.

Note: As has been demonstrated: a. VB scripting provides a way to generate the periodic layout. b. VB script can also design other objects that can be draw in the layout. such as input plane, Observation Objects. c. For more detail information about VB scripting, please refer to the VB Scripting Reference.

Make sure you save the layout.

333

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Setup simulation parameters

Step 1 2 Action Select 2D simulation parameters under the Simulation menuSimulation Parameters dialog box appears In the Simulation Parameters dialog, set up the following parameters TE simulation Mesh Delta X: 0.015 Mesh Delta Z: 0.015 Time Step Size: Auto Run for 1000 Time steps Click Advanced Button to set up the Boundary condition Set X and Z edge as Anisotropic PML boundary condition. Number of Anisotropic PML layers: 15 Set other parameters with default value.

Perform the simulation

Click Run button in the Simulation Parameters to start the Simulation In the Analyzer, the time domain response for each field components can be observed After the simulation, click Yes to start the Analyzer.

Perform far field analysis for the diffraction wave.

Step 1 2 3 4 Action In the OptiFDTD Analyzer, select Crosscut Viewer in the Tools Crosscut Viewer window appear In the crosscut viewer, select Definition of the Cross Cut as z-direction. Move the slice position to mesh point equal to 92, ( Position: -0.12) Observe the near field in the current slice Select Far Field in the tools menu of cross cut viewer. Far field transform dialog box appears. (Figure 4)

334

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Figure 4 Far-field Calculation dialog box

In the Far Field Calculation dialog box. Set up the following parameters. Wavelength: 0.63 Refractive index: 1.5+0i Angle Initial: -90.0 Angle Final: 90.0 Number of Steps: 721 Distance: 100, 000*wavelength Intensity

6 7

Click Calculate button to start the calculation and save the results as Farfield.ffp. Start the Opti 2D Viewer and load the Farfield.ffp. The far field is shown in Figure 5.

335

LESSON 15 - SIMULATIONS OF GRATINGS CREATED WITH VB SCRIPT

Figure 5 Far field Pattern in Opti 2D Viewer

336

LESSON 16 CALCULATING POWER TRANSMITTANCE AND REFLECTION USING VB SCRIPT

Lesson 16 Calculating Power Transmittance and Reflection using VB Script

OptiFDTD provides comprehensive post-simulation analysis tools. Such as transmittance spectrum analysis, mode overlap calculation, input overlap calculation, far field calculation, Poynting vector analysis, polarized power calculation and so on. These analysis tools were mainly used in the analyzer. Some users may want to perform the sweep simulation and want feedback the results to the layout designer so that the layout can be optimized, or some users may want to get the power transmission/reflection spectrum results without the manipulation of opening the analyzer. Now these works are possible by using the VB script for the 2D layout.

Access to the simulation result data of Observation Objects is a critical feature needed for optimization of the designed devices. Exposure of the available data through the VB Script interface allows for implementation of the basic optimization algorithms within the script and provides the means to access third party solutions supporting COM Automation

OptiFDTD provides the following VB script function based the Observation Line Power post-simulation analysis. 8 PowerAtCenterWavelength() Purpose: Calculates power at the Center Wavelength. The Center Wavelength value is specified at the primary (key) Input Plane. All types of 2D (CW, GMCW) simulations support this function. PowerAtWavelength( double dWavelength ) Arguments: dWavelength- specifies a wavelength value for which the calculations should be performed. Wavelength value must be greater than zero Purpose: Calculates power at the specified Wavelength. This function should be used with 2D GMCW simulations. It can be used with 2D CW simulations as well. However, in this case it makes sense only when nonlinear materials have been used to construct project components, and one can expect some harmonic frequencies to be generated. 10 CalcPowerSpectrum( dStartWavelength, dEndWavelength, nNumberOfPoints ) Arguments: dStartWavelength- a double value of the spectrum start wavelength. Its value has to be smaller than the value of End Wavelength argument. dEndWavelength- a double value of the spectrum end wavelength. Its value has to be greater than the value of Start Wavelength

337

LESSON 16 CALCULATING POWER TRANSMITTANCE AND REFLECTION USING VB SCRIPT

nNumberOfPoints- an integer value of the number of sampling points within the spectrum. Its value has to be greater than one. Purpose: Calculates power spectrum for the specified number of wavelength sampling points. This function can be used only with 2D GMCW simulations. When used with other type of simulations, the function will return zero as the power value. 11 GetPowerAtSpectralPoint( nPointIndex ) Arguments: nPointIndex- an integer value of the spectral point. The points are indexed starting from zero Purpose: Retrieves a value of previously calculated power at the specified sampling point. The function will return zero if called before the CalcPowerSpectrum() has been executed. 12 CalcNormalizedPowerSpectrum( dStartWavelength, dEndWavelength, nNumberOfPoints, sInputPlaneLabel ) Arguments: dStartWavelength- a double value of the spectrum start wavelength. Its value has to be smaller than the value of End Wavelength argument. dEndWavelength- a double value of the spectrum end wavelength. Its value has to be greater than the value of Start Wavelength nNumberOfPoints- an integer value of the number of sampling points within the spectrum. Its value has to be greater than one. sInputPlaneLabel- label of the Input Plane, which signal is going to be used for normalization. The Input Plane with the specified label must be one of the active ones generating GMCW signal. Purpose: Calculates power spectrum normalized to the power signal of the specified Input Plane, for the specified number of wavelength sampling points. This function can be used only with 2D GMCW simulations. When used with other type of simulations, the function will return zero as the power value. Note: Normalization is calculated against an existing, active Input Plane. The Input Plane must generate GMCW signal. 13 GetNormalizedPowerAtSpectralPoint( nPointIndex ) Arguments: nPointIndex- an integer value of the spectral point. The points are indexed starting from zero Purpose: Retrieves a value of previously calculated power at the specified sampling point. The function will return zero if called before the CalcNormalizedPowerSpectrum() has been executed.

338

LESSON 16 CALCULATING POWER TRANSMITTANCE AND REFLECTION USING VB SCRIPT

Note: For more detail on this function, please refer to the VB Script Reference manual. OptiFDTD provides a template in a sample file to show you how to use these functions. Users are encouraged to copy this template as their own project. The template sample can be found in the sample folder: Sample36_VBS_ ToGet_Power_Spectrum.FDT The following demonstrates these functions. Step 1 Action In the OptiFDTD Sample folder, open Sample36_2D_TE_VBS_PowerSpectrum.FDT in the Waveguide Layout Designer. Double-click on the Input Plane to check the 2D input wave settings. Select all the objects in the layout, then click Delete key to delete all the objects Click Test Script shortcut toolbar or select Test Script in the Simulation menu Now al the objects in the layout are recreated by VB script. 5 6 Click the Scripting tab to go to the Script page. This layout is designed by VB script. In the Scripting page, the first 110 lines is the VB code to generate the layout. After the first 110 lines, it is the code to get the power transmittance and reflection. A VB subroutine is designed which contained the above VB function. The user can just copy the subroutine to their own design to get the corresponding power or power transmittance value. Save this layout to a different folder. Note: You can change the project name 8 9 Select Simulation 2D using Script to start the simulation. After the simulation, you will find that the following result files are exported from the VB function. Sample36_2D_TE_VBS_ Power_Spectrum_NormalizedPowerSpectrum.txt Sample36_2D_TE_VBS_ Power_Spectrum_PowerAtCenterWavelength.txt Sample36_2D_TE_VBS_ Power_Spectrum_PowerAtWavelength.txt Sample36_2D_TE_VBS_ Power_Spectrum_PowerSpectrum.txt Note: Each file contains the results for two Observation lines due to the fact that the VB Script function called the spectrum calculation for each observation line.

2 3 4

339

LESSON 16 CALCULATING POWER TRANSMITTANCE AND REFLECTION USING VB SCRIPT

NOTES:

340

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Lesson 17 - Analysis of Photonic Crystal Fibers (PCF) in OptiFDTD

Introduction
In the past 10 years, photonic crystal fibers (PCF) have attracted much scientific and commercial interest. The research and design work for PCF starts from accurate modal analysis of the fiber. Once the modes are found, all of the PCF properties such as loss, dispersion, and cutoff can be determined.

There are general three types of PCF: holey fiber (HF), field-confined holy fiber (FCHF) and Hole-Assisted Light-guide Fiber (HALF), as shown in figure 1.

In OptiFDTD, the mode solver is combined with the FDTD engine so that FDTD simulation can use the modal field as input directly. In addition to this integrated mode solver, OptiFDTD also provides an independent mode solver to allow user to solve and study the modal solutions outside of an FDTD calculation. The PCF mode solver will mainly be used as an independent mode solver. Modal analysis requires two main steps: a. Create the layout representing a PCF b. Calculate the modes We will use our Waveguide Layout Designer to define the PCF layout, and then convert the layout to a refractive index distribution file. The mode solver will load-in the index distribution file and perform the modal analysis.

Some users may want to scan the wavelength to find out the cutoff wavelength, or scan the layout parameters. All of this is possible with OptiFDTD package.

The following section will demonstrate how a photonic crystal fiber can be analyzed in OptiFDTD.

341

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Sample 1- Photonic Crystal Fiber-Holey Fiber

The most common PCF is Holey Fiber as shown in Figure 1, the cladding region consists of a hexagonal array of air holes; One missing air-hole defines the core region. The real layout may have more layers of air holes, but it is sufficient to model only three layers since the mode is well confined [2]. To be safe, here we take five layers for the mode solving. We use the PBG array editor to define the hexagonal air hole. To make the core center in the simulation domains center, we need to draw a graph (see Figure 2) so that the detail dimension information can be marked. Such a graph can make the layout creation easier, so it is highly recommended.

Figure 1 Photonic Crystal Fiber cross-section

342

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 2 Five layers holey fiber

Please note: For this five layer holey fiber (a) The background material refractive index n = 1.46 (b) Hexagonal Air hole, periodic: a = 2.3um, n = 1.0, radius R = 0.6um (c) Simulation domain: z = 11*a, x = 11*a*sin(60) (d) The green dot is the hexagonal lattice original point: x = -5*a*sin(60o); z=0

Create the layout

To design a holey fiber structure, follow these steps. Step 1 2 Action Start Waveguide Layout Designer. To create a new project, select File > New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears.

343

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

3 4

Click Profiles and Materials. The Profile Designer window appears. Under the Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder and select New. A new Dielectric material dialog box appears. Type the following information: Name: n=1.46 Refractive index (Re:): 1.46 To save the material, click Store. N=1.46 appears in the FDTD-Dielectric folder in the directory and in the dialog box title bar. Under the Profiles folder, right-click the Channel folder and select New. The ChannelPro1 dialog box appears. Create the following channel profile: Profile name: Channel_Air 2D profile definition Material: Air Click Store. (Close the Profile Designer.or leave it open) Switch to the Layout Designer, and in the Initial Properties dialog box type/select the following: Waveguide Properties Width [m]: 0.6 Profile: Channel_Air Wafer Dimensions Length: length Width: width 2D Wafer Properties Material: n=1.46

7 8

9 10

11

Click OK in the initial dialog box. Click Yes in the question dialog box to start define the variables. Variables and Functions dialog box appears Because variable (length, width) is used in the initial dialog box .clicking OK will open the Parameter Editor dialog box In the Variables and Functions dialog box, define the following variables in the specified order then click OK to close the dialog box Name a b length width c R value 2.3um a*sin(pi/3) 11*a 11*b -5*b 0.6um ~lattice constant ~height of triangle cell ~length of domain ~width of domain ~X original point of lattice ~Radius of air hole

12

344

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 3 Variable and function dialog box

Note: you can access Variables and Functions dialog box at any time by selecting Simulations->Edit Parameters menu of Layout Designer

13 14

From the Draw menu, select PBG Crystal Structure. With the mouse cursor click once on the layout window, The PBG Crystal Structure appears in the layout window (see Figure 4). Click Select tool button (the arrow) on the shortcut toolbar to release the PBG selection.

345

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 4

Layout window with initial PBG layout

15

To edit the crystal structure, double-click on the PBG structure (a rectangular shape) on the layout. The Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box appears (Figure 5).

346

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 5 Crystal Lattice properties dialog box

16

In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, Set the following parameters Origin Horizontal, expression:0 Horizontal Offset:0 Vertical Expression:c Vertical Offset:0 Depth: 0.0 Azimuth: 0.0

Lattice Properties: Type: Fill: 2D Hexagonal Block Scale: a #A #C 11 12

Lattice Dimension:

347

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

17

In Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell, Add New, select Elliptic Waveguide from the drop-down menu and click New. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 6). In Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box set following value

In Center, Offset, type/select the following: Horizontal: 0.0 Vertical: 0.0 Type/select the following: Major radius: 0.6 Minor radius: 0.6 Orientation angle: 0.0 Channel thickness tapering: Use Default (Channel: None) Depth: 0.0 Label: Atom Profile: Channel_Air. Click OK. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box closes.

348

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 6

Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box

Note: When you return to the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined elliptic waveguide listed in Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell. Note: If you close the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, you will see the defined PBG structure in the layout window (see Figure 7).

349

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 7 PBG layout in designer window

18

In the layout designer, to select the PBG lattice, click the PBG area. The PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool (a shortcut toolbar beside the Arrow select tool as shown in figure 8) becomes active. Select this shortcut tool bar. When this tool is selected, right click on the photonic cell and click Cells Off to disable the cells. With this step, a five layer Holey fiber can be realized (see Figure 9).

350

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 8 Shortcut toolbar button of PBG Crystal Structure Cell Editing Tool

Figure 9 Five layers holey fiber

351

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

19

To observe the index distribution, please set a point source in the layout. The center Wavelength is 1.3um with Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave as time domain waveform Click 2D Simulation Parameters under Simulation menu, set following parameters and Click OK. Mesh Delta X: 0.08um Mesh Delta Z: 0.08um Run for 1 time steps

20

21

Click 2D Refr_Idx_Re(y) tab under the layout window to observe the refractive index distribution. (see Figure 10)

Figure 10

Refractive index distribution

352

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Convert Refractive index distribution to a file

To perform modal calculations we will use the stand-alone Mode Solver application. We need to export the refractive index distribution of the PCF cross-section and transfer it to the Mode Solver. To export the refractive index, follow these steps: Step 1 Action Set an input wave (with Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave as time domain waveform) in the layout, (This work was done in step 18 in a previous section) Set proper mesh size for mode solving (This work was done in step 19 in a previous section) Click 2D Refr_Idx_Re(y) tab to observe the refractive index distribution. (see figure 10) Select File->Export Refractive Index Distribution menu, Export Refractive Index Distribution dialog box appears (see Figure 11)

2 3 4

Figure 11 Export refractive index dialog box

Click OK, the refractive index distribution will be saved to a file called PCF_Holey_Fiber_five_layers01_2D.rid

353

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Perform the Modal analysis

Step 1 Action Open the stand-alone 3D Mode Solver from Tools: from the Start menu, select Programs > Optiwave Software > OptiFDTD 6.0 > Tools > Mode 3D. 3D Mode Solver appears (see Figure 12)
Figure 12 3D Mode Solver

2 3 4

Click File->New menu, select User Defined File and click OK in the pop up window. Click Browse button to load the previously exported refractive index file (PCF_Holey_Fiber_five_layers01_2D.rid--- in this tutorial ) Click Simulation menu and select ADI Method under Global Parameters. Global Data:ADI Method dialog appears ( see Figure 13)

354

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 13 Global data: ADI Method dialog box

In the Global Data: ADI Method dialog box, enter the following values, then click OK button to accept settings and close the dialog box Wavelength: Number of Modes: General: Solver: Mode: Waveguide: Setting: Start Field: Accuracy: Index Tolerance: Field Tolerance: Boundary Condition: TBC Note: Other setting leave as specified by default 1E-007 1E-005 Gaussian Complex Full Vector Initial Excitation: Along X Straight 1.3um 1

355

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Select Calculate ADI under simulation menu. Click Run button to start the modal analysis. 3D mode solver resulting window appears (see Figure 14). First, the refractive index distribution is displayed. Once the mode is solved (it takes a while), the view will change and display the modal field. (Clicking Display under Structure View will display the refractive index distribution structure again)

Note: : Save the field pattern by click Save As button Save the modal index by click Save Table Click Close in the file menu to close this window
Figure 14 3D mode solver results window

356

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Perform the wavelength scanning mode analysis

Step 1 Action In the 3D Mode Solver Window, click Edit Parameters under Simulation menu. Edit Parameter dialog box appears (see Figure 15).
Figure 15 Edit Parameters dialog box

In the Edit Parameter dialog box, Name field, enter wavelength and set its Value as 0.8, Click Add/Apply button to make the defined variable to be listed. Click Close to close the dialog box Click Scan Parameters under Simulation menu. Scan parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 16).

357

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 16 Scan Parameters dialog box

Select wavelength under Unassigned Parameters table, Click Add button to add variable wavelength as the scan parameter. Parameter wavelength will be listed in the bottom table. Set Number of Iteration as 31 and click Apply button. The table will extend to 31 lines. Click Assign button in the Leading parameter section, our wavelength will be set as Leading Parameter In the table grid, click wavelength, the whole column will be selected. inscroll to the line 31, Double click its edit cell and input iteration End Value of 1.4 Re-select the wavelength column and click Fill button. The data cells in the column will automatically be filled with the sampling points for each simulation sweep of the wavelength value. Click OK to close this Scan Parameter dialog box Select Simulations->Calculate ADI menu. In the Wavelength box enter the previously specified parameter name wavelength, select Full vector with initial excitation along Y. Set Complex Solver with TBC boundary conditions. Run the simulations The Mode Solver will perform a set of modal calculations sweeping the wavelength value. This approach is used to obtain the cutoff wavelength (see Figure 17)

5 6 7

9 10

11

358

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

Figure 17

Monitor the wavelength scan simulation

359

LESSON 17 - ANALYSIS OF PHOTONIC CRYSTAL FIBERS (PCF) IN OPTIFDTD

NOTES:

360

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Lesson 18 - Simulations with 64-bit 3D Simulator

The workflow required to perform simulations with 64-bit 3D Simulator is almost the same as for the regular 32-bit simulator(s): Step 1 Action Create a New Layout a. Define the material and waveguide in profile designer b. Set up the initial simulation domain c. 2 3 Draw the waveguide Define simulation parameters Define input wave a. Set up time domain input b. Set up the transverse domain input 4 5 6 7 Observe the refractive Index Set up the Observation Objects (data-detectors) to extract the field pattern and transmission/Reflection spectrum. Launch 64-bit 3D Simulator (menu Simulation->Simulate 3D using 64-bit Simulator). Perform the post-simulation analysis

The 64-bit simulator differs from 32-bit mainly in the aspect of DFT calculations. The 32-bit simulators perform DFT calculations and time domain data are stored for the whole volume. However, the calculation domain of the 64-bit simulator can occupy TB (Tera Bytes) of computer memory. In this case, the amount of generated data would be enormous, which would be impractical and unmanageable. To resolve this issue, the DFT calculations are performed only for the Observation Areas, and time domain data are collected only for Observation Points. You can configure the DFT settings in Simulation Parameters for 3D 64-bit Simulations. When you choose menu option Simulation->Simulate 3D using 64-bit Simulator you will be presented with 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box specific for the 64-bit simulator. OptiFDTD provides default configuration of Spectral DFT settings. See User Reference manual for description. Note: Performance of simulations on multiprocessor (multi-core) computers. In order to acheive the highest performance (speed) of the simulation, it is recommended that the computer is not used while the simulations are in progress: The calculations are performed on all available processors in so called true-parallel algorithm (the only applicable parallel processing method for

361

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

FDTD algorithm). In result the overall performance (speed) of the simulations depends on the processing speed of the slowest processor, since all other processors have to wait until the last processor completes its simulation sequence. If the computer is used for other tasks during the simulations, the operating system will take some CPU time to support the user running his application (e.g. email, internet browser, word editors, etc.). It will decrease the CPU time spent by one (or more) of the processors on simulations. DFT Calculations. When performing simulations with 64-bit Simulator, make sure that the designed project has Observation Objects (Areas or Points) defined. Otherwise, the simulation results will not be stored for the post-simulation analysis. All 32-bit simulators are also available under 64-bit machine. However, their memory usage is still limited to 2GB.

Create a new Layout

The following lesson uses straight channel waveguide as an example. Note: The corresponding project file can be found in the Sample file folder, Sample43_64bit_3D_Simulations_Getting_Started.fdt. If you already familiar with layout creation, please open the example project and go to the step Perform the 64Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation Please see other tutorial lessons to get familiar with the Layout Designer features

Layout creation steps

Step 1 Action Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs >Optiwave Software > OptiFDTD > Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens Create a new project From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears Define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project Click Profiles and Materials button in the area in Initial Properties Dialog. The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens, Note: Profile Designer can also be opened independently at any time a. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 of Profile Designer OptiFDTD, under Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder. A context menu appears. Select New, the FDTD-Dielectric dialog box appears. By default the constant refractive index (Const Ref. Idx) is selected. Type the following information

362

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Name: n=1.5 Constant refractive index (isotropic) (Re): 1.5 Click Store to save this material, Material n=1.5 will be listed under the FDTD-Dielectric folder b. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following Profile name: waveguide Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: WG Width: Thickness: Offset: 1.0 1.0 0.0

In the Material list, select n=1.5 Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. Waveguide appears in the Channel folder in the directory, 4 5 Return to Initial Properties Dialog box of Waveguide Layout Designer Either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer. Type the following information in each corresponding area in Initial Properties Dialog box Waveguide Properties: Width (um): Profile: 1.0 Waveguide

(This profile will be used by default when drawing a waveguide in the layout window) Wafer Dimension Length (um): Width (um): 3D Wafer Properties 7.0 3.0 (z-direction dimension) (x-direction dimension)

Cladding Material: Air Cladding Thickness: 2.0 (y-direction dimension) Substrate Material: Air Substrate Thickness: 1.0 (y-direction dimension) Click OK in Initial Properties Dialog box. OptiFDTD Designer[OptiFDTDigner1] window appears. Note: Your shortcut Toolbars may not all appear in the window. You can change it from the View->Toolbars menu option. Click + (zoom) toolbar button to enlarge the layout window

363

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Draw a linear waveguide in the layout window From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. Or select the Linear Waveguide shortcut toolbar. In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. (Change the mouse drawing tool by selecting the arrow shortcut icon on the toolbar) To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. Click the Start tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (um):0.0(Start point for z-direction) Vertical offset (um): 0.0 (Start point for x-direction) Width (um): 1.0 (Waveguide x-direction width) Depth (um): 0.0 (Waveguide y direction bottom) Label: Linear1 Channel Thickness Tapering:Use Default (Channel: None) (Waveguide y-direction thickness setting)

Click the End tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (um): Vertical offset (um): 7.0 0.0

Note: You can also set a variable in the expression - click Evaluate to verify the final value of the expression. Horizontal means the z-direction. Vertical means the x-direction. Depth means the y-direction. From the Profile list, select Waveguide. Click OK to finished the waveguide setting

Now, you have defined a simple straight waveguide. For more complex layout, Please refer to other tutorial lessons. Note: To add new materials and waveguide profiles select the Profiles and materials under the Edit menu of OptiFDTD Designer window to start the Profile Designer. To change the simulation domain dimension, select Wafer Properties under the Edit menu of OptiFDTD Designer window.

364

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Define Input Wave

The Input Wave signal is defined within the Input Plane. To insert the Input Plane and set the excitation wave, follow the steps below: Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane, or select Vertical Input Plane shortcut toolbar (The Vertical Input Plane is in the x-y plane for 3D.) Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the Input Plane. A red line that represents the input plane appears in the layout window. To set up the Input Plane properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane) in the layout window. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears. Set the time domain Input Plane basic information. a. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears. b. Wavelength (um): 1.5 Note: 5 Continuous Wave Wavelength is a single wavelength that is used in simulations. Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave Wavelength is the carrier wavelength (center wavelength) for the pulse simulations.

3 4

Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab. To set the time domain input waveform. The time domain pulse graphics appear. Type the following values for the time domain input plane Time offset (sec.): 2.0e-14 Half width (sec.): 0.5e-14 Note: Both the time domain wave and frequency domain wave for the Input Plane appear. The Frequency domain information is obtained by FFT from the time domain series. Right Click on the graph and select the Zoom In tool to enlarge the selected graph region. You can observe the bandwidth in this way. Adjust half width can adjust the bandwidth

To set up the general information (transverse field distribution) for the Input Plane, click the General tab Input Field Transverse: Z Position (um): Plane Geometry: Label: Modal 1.5 Positive direction InputPlane1 (default)

365

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Note: Positive Direction means that the Input Plane is excited to the positive z-direction. TF/SF technique is used for the excitation algorithm, which makes sure the wave is excited and propagates only in one direction, and then behind the input wave the pure reflection wave can be detected. 7 To solve the 3D transverse mode, click the 3D Transverse tab. Select one waveguide (it is selected by default in this sample) and click Find Mode. ADI Method mode solver dialog box appears. Follow the default setting to solve the mode: General Solver: Waveguide: Mode: Semi-vector TM, (y-polarization input wave) Click Calc Mode to start the mode solving. The modal field and the modal index will be shown in the M3DTmp3 window. Clicking this window will save the mode solver setting and come back to input plane dialog box. Note: Click Data in mode solver M3DTmp3 window to save (export) the results. 8 To complete the Input Plane setup, click OK. Real Straight

366

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Define Simulation Parameters

Step 1 Action From the Simulation menu, select Simulate 3D Using 64-bit Simulator. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears (see Figure 1).3D simulation parameters dialog box
Figure 1 3D Simulation parameters dialog box

Type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (mm): Mesh Delta Y (mm): Mesh Delta Z (mm): 0.07 0.07 0.07

367

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Note: The total mesh number for each orientation will be calculated automatically, once focus is removed from the specific edit region. 3 To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type the following values for the boundary condition: Anisotropic PML layer number: Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: Power of grading Polynomial: 4 5 Run for 900 time steps Time sampling interval: 5 Note: - Time steps size The default value ensures stability and accuracy of FDTD simulations - Time step number The default value ensures that the wave completes propagation through the whole layout - Time sampling interval This sampling rate applies to observation areas. It determines how many time domain response sample points are used for the spectrum calculation. 6 Click the Spectrum button to set the spectrum range (refer to Figure 2) Set Number of Samples to 61, Uncheck the Auto checkbox, Check the Use Wavelength radio button Set Start wavelength as 1.35um Set end wavelength as 1.65um and press Ok button to accept changes 12 1.0e-12 1.0 3.5

368

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 2 Spectrum DFT simulation parameters

Click Ok button to accept the specified simulation parameters

Observe the Refractive Index

Step 1 Action Click on 3D_Ref_Idx-Re(y) tab on the bottom of the layout frame or select Refractive Index in the View Menu. View of the refractive index distribution slice appears. Change the slice orientation and move the slice position to observe the index distribution (refer to Figure 3, and Figure 4)
Select Height Plot shortcut toolbar to observe the refractive index in height plot format. Right click on OptiFDTD graph to display the available graph tools/menus

369

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 3 Refractive index in x-z orientation at y=0.5

370

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 4 Refractive index in x-y orientation at z=0

Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector)

For the 32-Bit FDTD simulation, observation objects will record all the time domain response so that spectrum analysis can be performed in analyzer. For 64-Bit FDTD simulation, Observation points will still record all the time domain response in each single point, but Observation area will perform the spectral analysis in simulator and save the spectrum DFT results to the analyzer file. For 64bit FDTD simulation, Observation Points or Observation Area must be present; otherwise simulations will not store any results for further analysis. Observation Point Observes the time domain and frequency domain response. The transmission function can be obtained from the Observation Point analysis. Observation Area It is used to compute power transmission ratio, and normalized power (power transmission /reflection) versus wavelength.

371

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Step 1 2 3

Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. ( or select Observation Point shortcut from the toolbar) Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation point. The Observation Properties Point dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: Label: Data Components Ex, Ey 5.2 0.0 0.5 ObservationPoint1

4 5

Click OK to close the dialog box Repeat step 1-4 to design another Observation point with the following properties General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: Label: Data Components Ex, Ey Note: The Observation points are placed at the position where the peak value is expected. This will make sure that the response in observation point can be compared with the input wave peak value. Observation point 1 will detect the transmitted wave while Observation Point 2 will detect the reflected wave. 0.7 0.0 0.5 ObservationPoint2

6 7 8

From the Draw menu, select Observation XY Area ( or select Observation XY Area shortcut from the toolbar) Place the observation XY area in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the observation area. The Observation Properties XY area dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box

372

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: X Length: Y length: Label: Data Components Ey, Hx Note: 9 10 The time domain response for selected data components will be recorded through the simulation. Ey and Hx together will determine the y-polarization z-propagation Poynting vector 5.5 0.0 0.5 3.0 3.0 ObservationArea1

Click OK to close the Observation area dialog box Repeat step 6-9 to design an Observation XZ Area with the follow properties General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: X Length: Z length: Label: Data Components Ey 3.5 0.0 0.5 2.0 7.0 ObservationArea2

Click Save under File menu to save the designed project. Now your layout should look like the one on Figure 5

373

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 5 Layout

Perform the 64Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation

Step 1 2

Action From the Simulation menu, select the Simulate 3D using 64-Bit Simulator option. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Click Run to start the simulation. The progress window appears (see Figure 6). It displays status of the simulations.

374

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 6 FDTD simulation progress window

Visualization of intermediate simulation results. First, configure the snapshot settings. Select Simulation ->Take Snapshot menu option. The Set Snapshot dialog box appears (Figure 7) Click Browse button to select the location of the output file Check the observation areas or observation points. The time domain response in the selected observation objects for the current time-step will be save to the file Click OK to close this dialog box

375

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 7 Setting Snapshot dialog box

4 5

Click the Take Snapshot button in the simulation progress dialog box to save the time domain response in the current displayed time step Go to the folder where the snapshot is saved and with 2D or 3D Viewer observe the time domain response for a certain time step (refer to Figure 8)

Figure 8 The time domain snapshot observed in 3D Viewer from observation area 2

When Simulation is finished, you will be asked if you want to open the analyzer to view the results. Click yes to start the analyzer

376

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Post-Simulation Data Analysis

Our Analyzer provides a number of tools allowing for evaluation simulation results.

Observation Point

Step 1 2

Action Select Observation Area Analysis under the Tools menu in the Analyzer. Observation Point dialog box appears To observe the time domain response in the observation point, check the observation point object, select the field components button, and select Time radio button. (See Figure 9)

377

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 9 Time domain response in observation point

To get the transmission /reflection function response in an observation point, select Frequency FDT radio button. And type the following values (See Figure 10) Minimum wavelength: Maximum wavelength: Sample point: Normalize with: Click Update Graph button 1.3 1.6 1000 InputPlane1

378

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 10

Transmission/Reflection function based on Observation point

379

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Field pattern in Observation Area

Step Action

1 2 3

Select Observation Area in Observation Area Analysis dialog box. Select ObservationArea2 in the observation area check list Select wavelength 1.5 from the l/f list box

Note: Click l/f button to alternate the unit between wavelength and frequency The wavelength or frequency value is pre-set in the spectrum setting dialog box (refer to Figure 2)

4 5

Click Update Graph (see Figure 11) Repeat step 2 to step 4 for ObservationArea1 (See Figure 12)

380

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 11 Field pattern in Observation area 2

381

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Figure 12 Field pattern in Observation area 1

382

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Power transmission/reflection function

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Observation Area in Observation Area Analysis dialog box. Select ObservationArea2 in the observation area check list Select Power Spectrum button, Power Spectrum dialog box appears Check normalize with checkbox and click Calculate button, Power Transmission spectrum appears, (refer to Figure 13)
Figure 13 Power transmission spectrum

383

LESSON 18 - SIMULATIONS WITH 64-BIT 3D SIMULATOR

Note: In order to perform power calculations, the necessary field components have to be selected for different polarization power. When an observation area is behind the input wave, it can detect the reflection power spectrum

384

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Lesson 19 - Heating absorption simulation using 64bit processor

Metallic and lossy materials in solar cells or other semiconductor devices in general absorb part of the light wave energy, converting it to heat. This lesson demonstrates the heating absorption simulation in OptiFDTD The layout we will simulate is shown in Figure 1, the corresponding project file (Sample44_3D_Heating_Absorption_64bit.fdt) can be found under the Sample folder of your software installation directory

Sample44_3D_Heating_Absorption_64Bit.fdt.
Figure 1 simulated layout

The layout represents a square of periodic cones with height (z-direction length) of 1m deposited on the flat substrate. The diameter of the cones bottom is 1m, the

385

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

cone and substrate have the same refractive index which is n=2.4-j0.056. The cone lattice extends to infinity in x and y-direction, the input wave is the plane wave with zero tilting angle. In this case a 5X5 cone layout is taken for simulation with the x- and y-edge set as periodic boundary condition. The following are the detailed steps for the layout creation, simulation, and post-simulation analysis.

Layout creation steps

Step 1 Action Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs ->Optiwave Software -> OptiFDTD -> Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens. 2 Create a new project. From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. 3 Define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project. Click the Profiles and Materials button in the Initial Properties dialog. The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens. Note: At any time, you can open the Profile Designer from the Edit->Profiles and Materials... menu of the Layout Designer or from the Start menu. So you can make appropriate modifications to the defined materials and profiles whenever it is needed. a. In the three listing of profiles and materials of Profile Designer under OptiFDTD_Designer1 in the Materials folder, right-click the FDTDDielectric folder. A context menu appears. Select New, the FDTDDielectric dialog box appears. By default the constant refractive index (Const Ref. Idx) is selected. Type the following information: Name: n=2.4-j0.056 Constant refractive index (isotropic): (Re): 2.4, (Im): 0.056 Click Store to save this material, Material n=2.4-j0.056 will be listed under the FDTD-Dielectric folder b. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information: Profile name: ChannelPro1

386

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Layer1 Width: Thickness: Offset: 5 5 0.0

In the Material list, select n=2.4-j0.056 Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. ChannelPro1 appears in the Channel folder, c. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Fiber folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Fiber Profile dialog box appears. Type the following: Profile name: FiberPro1 Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Rx (x-direction radius): Ry (y-direction radius): Layer1 0.5 0.5

In the Material list, select n=2.4-j0.056 Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. FiberPro1 appears in the Channel folder,

Return to Initial Properties dialog box of Waveguide Layout Designer Either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer. Type the following information in each corresponding area in Initial Properties dialog box Waveguide Properties: Width (um): Profile: 1.0 FiberPro1

(This profile will be used by default when drawing a waveguide in the layout window) Wafer Dimension Length (um): Width (um): 5.0 (z-direction dimension) 5.0 (x-direction dimension)

387

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

3D Wafer Properties Cladding Material: Cladding Thickness: Substrate Material: Substrate Thickness: Air 5 (y-direction dimension) Air 0 (y-direction dimension)

Click OK in Initial Properties dialog box. OptiFDTD Designer[OptiFDTDigner1] window appears. Note: If not all Toolbars appear in the Layout Desinger window, you can change it from the View->Toolbars menu option. Click + (zoom) toolbar button to enlarge the layout window. Open Wafer Properties from the Edit menu to modify simulation domain properties. Select Profiles and Materials from the Edit menu to open the Profile Designer where you can add and modify materials and profiles. Draw a linear waveguide (the substrate in Figure 1) in the layout window From the Draw menu, select Linear Waveguide. Or select the Linear Waveguide shortcut toolbar. In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point. A linear waveguide appears in the layout window.(Change the mouse drawing tool by selecting the arrow shortcut icon on the toolbar) To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Linear Waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. From the Profile list, select ChannelPro1. Click the Start tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (um): 3.0 (Start point for z-direction) Vertical offset (um): 0.0 (Start point for x-direction) Click the End tab and type the following values: Horizontal offset (um): Vertical offset (um): Channel Thickness Tapering: Taper: Start: End: Width (um): Linear 5 5 5.0 (Waveguide x-direction width) 5.0 0.0

Use Default (Channel: None): Uncheck

388

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Depth (um): Label:

0.0 (Waveguide y direction bottom) Linear1

Click OK to finished the waveguide setting

Note: You can parameterize the waveguide by entering a user-defined variable (parameter) in the Expression field. The expression fields are marked with "fx". For example you can enter StartPosZ (or an expression like 2*StartPosZ), in the Expression field of Horizontal position definition. After that press the Evaluate button, to see the resulting Position value. If the specified parameter has not been defined, then the software will prompt you to define it. Horizontal means the z-direction. Vertical means the x-direction. Depth means the y-direction. Draw Cones From the Draw menu, select PBG Crystal Structure. With the mouse cursor click once on the layout window, The PBG Crystal Structure appears in the layout window. Click Select tool button (the arrow) on the shortcut toolbar to release the PBG selection. Double-click on the PBG structure (a rectangular shape) on the layout. The Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box appears. In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, set the following lattice reference position parameters: Origin Horizontal Offset: Vertical Offset: Depth: 2.0 -2.0 0.5

In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, set the following Lattice vector parameters: Lattice Properties: Type: Fill: Lattice Dimension: Scale: #A: 1.0 5 3D rectangular Block

389

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

#B: #C:

5 1

In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, set the Atom Waveguide ( Cone) properties:

In Atom Waveguide in Unit Cell, Add New, select Linear Taper Waveguide from the drop-down menu and click New. The Linear Taper Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. In Linear Taper Waveguide Properties dialog box set following value: Profile: Start Horizontal Offset: Vertical Offset: End Horizontal Offset: Vertical Offset: Fiber Diameter Tapering User Default (checked) Width Start: End Depth: 0 1.0 0 1 0 0 0 FiberPro1

Click OK to close the Linear Taper Waveguide setting. In the Crystal Lattice Properties dialog box, click OK to close the Crystal Lattice setting.

The layout creation is finished; the layout window should like the Figure 2

390

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Figure 2 Layout in OptiFDTD

Define Input Wave

The Input Wave signal is defined within the Input Plane. To insert the Input Plane and set the excitation wave, follow the steps below: Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane, or select Vertical Input Plane shortcut toolbar (The Vertical Input Plane is in the x-y plane for 3D.) Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the Input Plane. A red line that represents the input plane appears in the layout window. To set up the Input Plane properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane) in the layout window. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears. Set the time domain Input Plane basic information. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears. Wavelength (um): 1.55

3 4

391

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Note: Continuous Wave The specified wavelength is a single wavelength that is used in simulations. Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave The specified wavelength is the carrier wavelength (center wavelength) for the pulse simulations. 5 Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab. To set the time domain input waveform. The time domain pulse graphics appear. Type the following values for the time domain input plane: Time offset (sec.): Half width (sec.): Note: 6 Both the time domain wave and frequency domain wave for the Input Plane appear. The Frequency domain information is obtained by FFT from the time domain series. Right Click on the graph and select the Zoom In tool to enlarge the selected graph region. You can observe the bandwidth in this way. Adjust half width can adjust the bandwidth To set up the general information (transverse field distribution) for the Input Plane, click the General tab Input Field Transverse: Rectangular Click 3D transverse to set the rectangular wave properties as the following: Center Position X: Half width X Center Position Y: Half width Y Tilting Angle: Effective refractive Index: Polarization: Amplitude: 7 0.0 3.0 2.5 3.0 0.0 Local Linear Y 1.0 1.5e-14 0.4e-14

Click General tab. Set z-position in the Geometry and Wave Configure region as 1.0

392

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Define Simulation Parameters

Step 1 Action From the Simulation menu, select Simulate 3D Using 64-bit Simulator. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box. 3D simulation parameters dialog box ( Figure 3)
Figure 3 3D Simulation parameters dialog box

393

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Uncheck Auto in the mesh parameters region, type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (mm): Mesh Delta Y (mm): Mesh Delta Z (mm): 0.025 0.025 0.025

To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears (Figure 4). Type the following values for the boundary condition: Boundary Condition X: PBC Y: PBC Z: APML APML Calculation Parameters: Anisotropic PML layer number: Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: Power of grading Polynomial: 10 1.0e-12 5 3.5

394

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Figure 4 Boundary condition dialog box

4 5

Set the Time Steps to 2400. Set the Time Sampling Interval at 4. Note: This is the time domain data sampling rate for spectrum analysis.

Click the Spectrum button to set the spectrum range (refer to Figure 5) Set Number of Samples to 81, Uncheck the Auto checkbox, Check the Use Wavelength radio button Set Start wavelength as 1.35um Set end wavelength as 1.75um and press Ok button to accept changes

395

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Observe the Refractive Index (Optional)

Step 1 Action Click on 3D_Ref_Idx-Re(y) tab on the bottom of the layout frame or select Refractive Index in the View menu. View of the refractive index cross-cut slice appears. In the Orientation region which is in the left-bottom area of the window, change the slice orientation and move the slice position to observe the index distribution (refer to Figure 5, and Figure 6) Select Height Plot shortcut toolbar to observe the refractive index in height plot format. Right click on OptiFDTD graph to display the available graph tools/menus.

Figure 5 Refractive index distribution in xz plane at y=0.5

396

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Figure 6 Refractive index distribution in xy plane at z=2.4

Setup the Observation Objects (result data detector)

For the 32-Bit FDTD simulation, observation objects will record the entire time domain response so that spectrum analysis can be performed in analyzer. For 64-Bit FDTD simulation, Observation Points will still record the time domain response in each single point, but Observation Area will perfrom the spectral anaycis during the simulations and save the resulting DFT spectral data only. No time domain response data is stored for Observation Areas, due to its huge volume. For 64bit FDTD simulations, Observation Points or Observation Areas must be present, otherwise no result data will be stored during the simulations. Observation Point

Observes the time domain and frequency domain response. The transmission function can be obtained from the Observation Point analysis. Observation Area

It is used to compute power transmission ratio, normalized power (power transmission /reflection) versus wavelength and Heating Absorption.

397

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Step 1 2

Action From the Draw menu, select Observation Point. (Or select Observation Point shortcut from the toolbar). Place the Observation Point in the desired position in the layout. Doubleclick the observation point. The Observation Properties Point dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: Label: Data Components (3D) Ex, Ey 4 0.0 2.5 ObservationPoint1

3 4 5 6

Click OK to close the dialog box. From the Draw menu, select Observation XY Area ( or select Observation XY Area shortcut from the toolbar) Place the Observation XY area in the desired position in the layout. Double-click the Observation Area. The Observation Properties XY area dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: X Length: Y length: Label: Data Components (3D) Ey, Hx, Ex, Hy 2.5 0.0 2.5 5.0 5.0 ObservationArea1

Repeat step 4-6 to design an Observation XY Area with the following properties: General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: X Length: Y length: Label: Data Components Ey, Hx, Ex, Hy 3.5 0.0 2.5 5.0 5.0 ObservationArea2

398

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Repeat step 4-6 to design an Observation XZ Area with the following properties: General Center Horizontal Offset: Center Vertical Offset: Center depth: Z Length: X length: Label: Data Components Ex, Ey, Ez 2.5 0.0 0.5 5.0 5.0 ObservationArea3

Click Save under File menu to save the designed project.

Perform the 64Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Simulation menu, select the Simulate 3D using 64-Bit Simulator option. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Click Run to start the simulation. The progress window appears, it displays the status of the simulations. Visualization of intermediate simulation results. When the Simulation Process window appears, from menu, select Simulation ->Take Snapshot menu option. The Setting Snapshot dialog box appears. Click the Browse button to select the location of the output file. Check the observation areas or observation points. The time domain response in the selected observation objects for the current time-step will be saved to the file Click OK to close this dialog box. Click the Take Snapshot button in the simulation progress dialog box to save the time domain response in the current displayed time step. Go to the folder where the snapshot is saved and with 2D or 3D Viewer observe the time domain response for a certain time step. When the simulation is complete, click Yes to open the annalyzer.

399

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Post-Simulation Data Analysis

Our Analyzer provides a number of tools allowing for evaluation of different simulation results. The Heating absorption can be evaluated only in the Observation Area.

Step

Action

1 2 3 4 5

Open results file by analyzer. In the Tools menu, select Observation Area Analysis to open the dialog box. Click on the Observation Area button to open ObservationArea2 in the observation area check list. Select wavelength 1.5 from the l/f list box Click the Update Graph button, the steady state field pattern in the observation area will be updated for the user specified wavelength. Click the Heating Absorption button, the Heating Absorption dialog appears From the wavelength list box, select the wavelength as 1.5m Click the Wx, Wy tab under the graph to observe the x-polarization, ypolarization heating absorption distribution. Click W to observe the total heating absorption distribution (refer to Figure 7)

400

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Figure 7 Heating absorption distribution

The absorbed heating in this whole observation can be read in this dialog box. When this value normalizes to the input power for the specified wavelength, it will give the heating absorption ratio as shown the right column in the dialog box. Equations for the heating absorption calculation can be found in the technical background To get the normalized heating absorption spectrum for the selected heating absorption polarization, (i.e. Wx, Wy or W) Click the Save Spectrum button, and specify the file name for the output file. Use the 2D viewer to load the exported file (refer to Figure 8)

401

LESSON 19 - HEATING ABSORPTION SIMULATION USING 64BIT PROCESSOR

Figure 8 Normalized total heating absorption spectrum.

Repeat steps 1-4 to observe the heating absorption for observation area 2 and 3.

402

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

Lesson 20 - 2D Total Field/Scattering Field(TF/SF) simulation and Radar Cross Section(RCS) Detection
2D Total Field/Scattering Field (TF/SF) is a special excitation type that excites arbitrary tilting plane wave in the enclosed rectangular surface. Inside the rectangular region, it generates the total field. Outside of this rectangular region, it is the pure scattering field. TF/SF simulation enable RADAR cross Section analysis. Complex grating layout analysis and other plane wave simulation will benefit from this TF/SF technique. The following lesson show how TF/SF separate the total field and scattering field in free space and how RCS is detected for an infinite dielectric rod. Note: The corresponding project file can also be found in the 32bit Sample file folder, Sample49_2D_TE_TFSF_without_object.FDT Sample50_2D_TE_TFSF_inf_Cylinder.FDT

Layout creation steps

Step 1 Action Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs ->Optiwave Software -> OptiFDTD> Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens. Create a new project. From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project. Click the Profiles and Materials button in the Initial Properties dialog. The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens. Note: At any time, you can open the Profile Designer from the Edit->Profiles and Materials... menu of the Layout Designer or from the Start menu. So you can make appropriate modifications to the defined materials and profiles whenever it is needed. a. In the tree listing of profiles and materials of Profile Designer under OptiFDTD_Designer1 in the Materials folder, right-click the FDTDDielectric folder. A context menu appears. Select New, the FDTDDielectric dialog box appears. By default the constant refractive index (Const Ref. Idx) is selected. Type the following information: Name: er=2.0 Constant refractive index (isotropic): (Re): 1.414214, (Im): 0.0

403

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION Click Store to save this material, Material er=2.0 will be listed under the FDTD-Dielectric folder. b. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information: Profile name: ChannelPro1 Under 2D profile definition, In the Material list, select er=2.0 To save the channel profile, click Store. ChannelPro1 appears in the Channel folder. 4 5 Return to Initial Properties dialog box of Waveguide Layout Designer. Either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer. Type the following information in each corresponding area in Initial Properties dialog box Waveguide Properties: Width (um): 1.0 Profile: ChannelPro1 Wafer Dimension Length (um): 2.0 (z-direction dimension) 6 Width (um): 2.0 (x-direction dimension) 2D Wafer Properties Material: Air Click OK in Initial Properties dialog box. OptiFDTD Designer[OptiFDTDigner1] window appears.

Note: If not all Toolbars appear in the Layout Designer window, you can change it from the View->Toolbars menu option. Click + (zoom) toolbar button to enlarge the layout window. Open Wafer Properties from the Edit menu to modify simulation domain properties. Select Profiles and Materials from the Edit menu to open the Profile Designer where you can add and modify materials and profiles.

Now we have defined a 2m2m 2D Air free space domain. We will generate a TF/SF plane wave in a rectangular region in this space. The total field region size will be 0.9m0.9m in the center space. To detect the pure scattering field, we will also put four observation line detector surrounding this TF/SF generated region. Each Observation line detector will be 0.15m apart from the each developed line.

404

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

Define Input Wave

To insert the TF/SF plane wave excitation follow the steps below: Step 1 2 Action From the Draw menu, select TFSF region. Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the TFSF region. A Green/red rectangular region that represents the TFSF appears in the layout window. (Figure 9)
Figure 9 Initial TFSF in the layout

To set up the TFSF Input wave properties, double-click the TFSF lines in the layout window. The TFSF Properties dialog box appears. Set the time domain Input Plane basic information. Select Continuous Wave Wavelength (um): 1.5

405

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION Note: Continuous Wave The specified wavelength is a single wavelength that is used in simulations. Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave The specified wavelength is the carrier wavelength (center wavelength) for the pulse simulations. 4 In the General Tab, input the following information: (Figure 10) Input Wave Angle: 0.0 [deg] X min: -0.45m X max: +0.45m Z min: 0.55m Z max: 1.45m

Figure 10 General Information for TF/SD input wave

a. In the 2D Transverse Tab, input the following information: Effective Refractive index : Background (wafer) Input Amplitude or Power Amplitude: 1.0

406

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION 5 To set up the scattering field detector properties, in the 2D SF Detectors Tab, input following information: a. In the Detector Distance tab, input following information (Figure 11) Note: Scattering field detectors are four observation lines beside the TFSF input lines, the position is determined by the distance to the input plane. In this case the Scattering field detector is out of the wave, this detector will be disabled.
Figure 11 2D SF Detector Distance

Distance X min side: 0.15m,Enabled Distance X max side: 0.15m, Enabled Distance Z min side: 0.15m,Enabled Distance Z max side: 0.15m, Enabled

b. In the 2D Data Components tab, input the following information (default) (Figure 12) For x-direction detector, Select x-direction Poynting vector Sx. For z-direction detector, Select z-direction Poynting vector Sz

407

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION
Figure 12 2D data Components for Scattering field detector

6 7

Click OK in TFSF Properties dialog box. A modified TFSF region appears in the layout window. (Figure 13) Click Save in the file menu to save this project to a file.

408

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION
Figure 13 TF/SF input plane in the layout window

Note: 2D TF/SF cannot work with other input wave type such as point source, input plane.

409

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

Define Simulation Parameters

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Simulation menu, select 2D 32bit Simulation Parameters. Simulation parameters dialog box appears Select TE as the 2D simulation type Turn off the auto check for Mesh Delta. Type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (um): 0.01 Mesh Delta Z (um): 0.01 4 To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Type the following values for the boundary condition: Anisotropic PML layer number: 10 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 10. Power of grading Polynomial: 3.5 Run for 800 time steps

410

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

Perform the 32Bit-FDTD FDTD Simulation

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select the 2D 32bit simulation parameters" Click Run to start the simulation. The Simulator window appears (Figure 14). It displays the time domain response for TFSF excitation.
Figure 14 2D Simulator window

When Simulation is finished, you will be asked if you want to open the analyzer to view the results. Click yes to start the analyzer.

411

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

Observe Steady state response in Analyzer

Step 1 Action In the analyzer window, Click Ey(DFT) AMP button under the graph window to observe the steady state response for this TFSF excitation in free space (Figure 15). Click Hx(DFT) AMP button or Hz(DFT) AMP button to Observe other field components. In the Components menu, click field components and select phase will bring the phase distribution for each field component.
Figure 15 Steady state response

2 3

412

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

RCS calculation for an infinity cylinder

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Re-open this layout in the OptiFDTD Designer. Select "Elliptic Waveguide" under the Draw menu, or select the Elliptic Waveguide in the shortcut toolbar Left-click and do not release the mouse to draw an elliptic waveguide in the layout. release the mouse by clicking the arrow toolbar. To adjust the position and the shape of the elliptic waveguide, in the layout window, double-click the Elliptical Waveguide. The Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box appears. In the Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box, input following information 6 Horizontal Offset: 1.0m Vertical Offset: 0.0m Major Radius Offset: 0.15m Minor Radius Offset: 0.15 m Orientation Angle offset: 0 Channel Thickness Tapering : User default Depth: Label;'Elliptic1 ProfileChannelPro1 Click OK in the Elliptic Waveguide Properties dialog box, the elliptic waveguide appears inside the TFSF region center. (Figure 16) 0.0m

413

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION
Figure 16 Elliptic waveguide in the TFSF region

7 8 9 10 11

Click Save as in the file menu to save this project to another file name. Click Run in the 2D 32bit simulation parameter dialog box to start the simulation. After the simulation, start the analyzer. In the analyzer, Click Observation Area Analysis under the tools menu, Observation area analysis dialog box appears. Click Scattering Field Analysis tab in the Observation Area Analysis dialog box, four Scattering Field(SF) detector is listed in this dialog box, select one of them, select the field components tab. then click update graph, the pure scattering field will be displayed. (Figure 17).

414

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION
Figure 17 Scattering field

12

Click RCS (Radar Cross Section) tab, the input the following information (default value) Start angle: 0o End Angle: 360o Sampling Point Count: 361 Far field Distance: 10, 000* wavelength

415

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION Note: 13 For single wavelength simulation, by default Wavelength is the center wavelength For Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave (GMCW), user can input new wavelength. RCS far-field formula is explained in the technical background. Click Calculate in the RCS tab page, RCS results will be displayer (Figure 10)
Figure 18 RCS results

Note: The above RCS results agreed with the results in the reference [1] as shown below (Figure 11)

416

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION
Figure 19 RCS results in reference

Click Export in RCS results dialog box can store the results to a file, RCS results file is an text file, the first three line is file header, the remaining first column is the angle, the second column is the far-field amplitude.

Reference:
[1] Umashhankar K. R, Taflove A.A "Novel method to analyze electromagnetic scattering of complex objects", IEEE Trans. On EMC, 1982, 24(4), pp. 397-450

417

LESSON 20 - 2D TOTAL FIELD/SCATTERING FIELD(TF/SF) SIMULATION AND RADAR CROSS SECTION(RCS) DETECTION

418

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Lesson 21 Simulation on 3D surface Plasmon based layout

Surface plasma wave is sensitive to the metallic material and the layout geometries. OptiFDTD provided build in time domain Lorentz_Drude for noble metals. In the following we will discuss two surface Plasmon layout simulations

Example 1 nano-gold particle simulation

In this example, we will show how a gold particle is simulated by OptiFDTD. In some surface Plasmon layouts, gold particles may distribute in an array format, if the input plane wave propagate straight forward and the array is periodic, then we can take one periodic cell for the simulation with transverse boundary set as periodic boundary condition (PBC). If single gold particle works independently, we can either set transverse boundary as absorbing condition or still set transverse boundary as PBC with simulation space is two three time larger than the nano particle size. The sample layout can be found in the 64bit sample folder, it is named as X64_Sample52_100nmGoldSphere_400nm_900nmPulse.fdt

Layout Creation steps

Step 1 Action Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs ->Optiwave Software -> OptiFDTD-> Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens. Create a new project. From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears. Define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project. Click the Profiles and Materials button in the Initial Properties dialog. The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens. Note: At any time, you can open the Profile Designer from the Edit->Profiles and Materials... menu of the Layout Designer or from the Start menu. So you can make appropriate modifications to the defined materials and profiles whenever it is needed. a. In the material folder of Master. Find build in gold material Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model, select this material and drag it to FDTD-Dielectric folder under Materials folder of current project OptiFDTD_Designer1, Click Store button in the Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model dialog box to save this material to the project. b. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information:

419

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Profile name: ChannelPro1 Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Layer1 Width: 0.1 Thickness: 0.1 Offset: 0.0

4 5

In the Material list, select Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store.

ChannelPro1 appears in the Channel folder. Return to Initial Properties dialog box of Waveguide Layout Designer. Either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer. Type the following information in each corresponding area in Initial Properties dialog box Waveguide Properties: Width (

m ): 0.1

Profile: ChannelPro1 Wafer Dimension Length (

m ): 0.6 (z-direction dimension) Width ( m ): 0.3 (x-direction dimension)

3D Wafer Properties

Cladding Material: Air Cladding Thickness: 0.3(y-direction dimension) Substrate Material: Air Substrate Thickness: 0 (y-direction dimension) 6 Click OK in Initial Properties dialog box. OptiFDTD Designer[OptiFDTDigner1] window appears. Note: 7 If not all Toolbars appear in the Layout Desinger window, you can change it from the View-Toolbars menu option. Click + (zoom) toolbar button to enlarge the layout window. Open Wafer Properties from the Edit menu to modify simulation domain properties. Select Profiles and Materials from the Edit menu to open the Profile Designer where you can add and modify materials and profiles. Draw a nano-particle in the layout. Select sphere under the 3D shapes of Draw menu. Click the mouse in the layout where the particle should be put. (Change the mouse drawing tool by selecting the arrow shortcut icon on the toolbar)

420

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

To adjust the position and the shape of the waveguide, in the layout window,double-click the sphere. The Sphere Waveguide Properties dialog box appears In the sphere waveguide properties dialog box, type the following values Position x: 0 Position y: 0.15 (m) Position z: 0.35 (m) Radius: Lable: Note: You can parameterize the waveguide by entering a user-defined variable (parameter) in the Expression field. The expression fields are marked with "fx". For example you can enter StartPosZ (or an expression like 2*StartPosZ), in the Expression field of Horizontal position definition. After that press the Evaluate button, to see the resulting Position value. If the specified parameter has not been defined, then the software will prompt you to define it. 8 Click 3D Layout Model tab under the layout window to observe the layout in 3D mode (see Figure 1) 0.05 (m) Sphere1

Material: Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model Click OK to finished the sphere setting

Figure 1 3D layout mode for sphere

421

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Define Input Wave

The Input Wave signal is defined within the Input Plane. To insert the Input Plane and set the excitation wave, follow the steps below: Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane, or select Vertical Input Plane shortcut toolbar (The Vertical Input Plane is in the x-y plane for 3D.) Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the Input Plane. A red line that represents the input plane appears in the layout window. To set up the Input Plane properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane) in the layout window. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears. Set the time domain Input Plane basic information. a. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears. b. Wavelength ( Note: 5 Continuous Wave: Wavelength is a single wavelength that is used in simulations. Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave: Wavelength is the carrier wavelength (center wavelength) for the pulse simulations. Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab to set the time domain input waveform. The time domain pulse graphics appear. Type the following values for the time domain input plane Time offset (sec.): 4.0e-15 Half width (sec.): 0.8e-15 Note: 6 Right Click on the graph and select the Zoom In tool to enlarge the selected graph region. You can observe the bandwidth in this way. Adjust half width can adjust the bandwidth To set up the general information (transverse field distribution) for the Input Plane, click the General tab Input Field Transverse: Rectangular( windowed plane wave) Z Position (

m ): 0.55( m )

m ): 0.2

Plane Geometry: Positive direction Label: InputPlane1 (default) 7 Click 3D Transverse to setup the plane wave setting

m ); Center Position Y: 0.15 ( m );

Center Position X: 0.0( Effective index: Local Polarization: Linear Y

Halfwidth X: 0.2(

m ) Halfwidth Y: 0.2( m )

422

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Amplitude: 1.0 (V/m2)

To complete the Input plane setup, click OK.

Define Simulation Parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select Simulate 3D Using 64-bit Simulator. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. In the mesh size region unselect Auto boxes, type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (m): 0.004 Mesh Delta Y (m): 0.004 Mesh Delta Z (m): 0.004 3 To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Set X and Y direction boundary condition as PBC Set Z direction boundary condition as APML Type the following values for the PML boundary condition: Anisotropic PML layer number: 16 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 60.0 Power of grading Polynomial: 3.5 4 5 Run for 4000 time steps Time sampling interval: 2 Note: Time steps size The default value ensures stability and accuracy of FDTD simulations Time step number The default value ensures that the wave completes propagation through the whole layout Time sampling interval This sampling rate applies to observation areas. It determines how many time domain response sample points are used for the spectrum calculation. 6 Click the Spectrum button to set the spectrum range Set Number of Samples to 101, Uncheck the Auto checkbox, Check the Use Wavelength radio button

m Set end wavelength as 0.9 m

Set Start wavelength as 0.4 and press Ok button to accept changes

423

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

ctangular( windowed plane wave) Z Position (

m ): 0.2

Plane Geometry: Positive direction

Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector)

For the 32-Bit FDTD simulation, observation objects will record all the time domain response so that spectrum analysis can be performed in analyzer. For 64-Bit FDTD simulation, Observation points will still record all the time domain response in each single point, but Observation area will perform the spectral analysis in simulator and save the spectrum DFT results to the analyzer file. For 64bit FDTD simulation, Observation Points or Observation Area must be present; otherwise simulations will not store any results for further analysis. Observation Point

Observes the time domain and frequency domain response. The transmission function can be obtained from the Observation Point analysis. Observation Area

It is used to compute power transmission ratio, and normalized power (power transmission /reflection) versus wavelength. Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu (or the shortcut toolbar), select Observation XY Area. Place the Observation XY Plane in the position after the sphere in the layout. Double-click the observation XY Area. The Observation Properties X-Y Area dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box General

m ) Center Vertical Offset(x-direction): 0.0( m ) Center depth (y-direction): 0.15 ( m ) X-Length 0.3 ( m ) Y-Length 0.3 ( m )
Center Horizontal Offset (z-drection): 0.5( Label: ObservationArea1 Data Components Ex, Ey, Hx, Hy 4 5 Click OK to close the dialog box Repeat steps 1 to 4 to design another Observation area with center horizontal offset at z=0.1 m General Center Horizontal Offset (z-drection): 0.1( Center Vertical Offset(x-direction): 0.0 Center depth (y-direction): 0.15 (m)

m ) m )

424

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

X-Length 0.3 (m) Y-Length 0.3 (m) Label: ObservationArea2 Data Components Ex, Ey, Hx, Hy Note: Observation1 will get the power spectral transmission function, Observation 2 is behind input plane and it will get the power spectral reflection function. 6 In the same manner we can put observation point in the layout.

Perform the 64Bit-FDTD Simulation

Step 1 2 3 Action From the Simulation menu, select the Simulate 3D using 64-Bit Simulator option. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Click Run to start the simulation. The progress window appears, it displays the status of the simulations. Visualization of intermediate simulation results. configure the snapshot settings. In the calculation progress window, select Simulation ->Take Snapshot menu option. The Set Snapshot dialog box appears Click Browse to select the location of the output file Check the observation areas or observation points. The time domain response in the selected observation objects for the current time-step will be save to the file 4 5 Click OK to close this dialog box Click the Take Snapshot button in the simulation progress dialog box to save the time domain response in the current displayed time step Go to the folder where the snapshot is saved and with 2D or 3D Viewer observe the time domain response for a certain time step

When the simulation is finished, you will be asked if you want to open the analyzer to view the results. Click yes to start the analyzer

425

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Post-Simulation Data Analysis

Step 1 Action Select Observation Area Analysis under the Tools menu in the Analyzer. Select Observation area button to active observation area analysis, Observation Area dialog box appears Select ObservationArea1 in the observation area check list Select Ey component. Select wavelength 0.8 from the

2 3 4 5 6

f list box

Click Update Graph (see Figure 2) Select Power Spectrum button, Power Spectrum dialog box appears, Select total Power Pz, Check normalize with checkbox and click Calculate button, PowerTransmission spectrum appears, (refer to Figure 3)

Figure 2 field pattern in observation area.

426

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Figure 3 Power transmission function

Note: Some researchers may check the extinction ratio from Mie theory for nanoparticle. Power transmission in this sample has the reverse properties compared with extinction ratio (see Figure 4)

Figure 4 Extinction ratio from Mie theory

427

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Example 2 Simulate Sub wavelenght holes in metallic film

It is generally accepted that the enhanced transmission is mediated by surface plasmon polaritons (SPPs) that exhibit resonances set up by the periodicity of the array. We will calculate the transmission through sub-wavelength holes in a gold film deposited in SiO2 substrate. Surface Plasmon wave that results from the periodic array of holes will enhance the transmission in a certain wavelength region. The original layout is shown in figure 5. It is periodic square-air-hole arrays that were created by ion milling in optically thick Au films (200 nm) deposited on glass. All arrays investigated have a period of 425 nm. The width of the square holes is varied (148nm, 165nm, 187nm, 196nm, 231nm, 247nm, 286nm). In this simulation the initial input plane wave will propagate to z-direction, so we can just pick up one unit cell for the simulation with x and y boundary set as PBC. This will save the simulation time. The sample layout can be found in the 64bit sample folder, it is named as X64_Sample53_HolesInGoldFilm_Pulse500nm_1000nm.FDT

Figure 5 Original layout and single cell layout

The following will show: 1) How to create the layout with variable. 2) How to setup variable to sweep the holes size. 3) How to perform the variable sweep simulation.

Layout Creation steps

Step 1 Action Open OptiFDTD Waveguide layout Designer From the Start menu, select Programs ->Optiwave Software -> OptiFDTD> Waveguide Layout Designer. OptiFDTD_Designer window opens. Create a new project. From the OptiFDTD_Designer File menu, select New. The Initial Properties dialog box appears.

428

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Define the material(s) and waveguide profile(s) that will be used in the project. Click the Profiles and Materials button in the Initial Properties dialog.The Profile Designer OptiFDTD opens. Note: At any time, you can open the Profile Designer from the Edit->Profiles and Materials... menu of the Layout Designer or from the Start menu. So you can make appropriate modifications to the defined materials and profiles whenever it is needed. a. In the material folder of Master. Find build in gold material Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model, select this material and drag it to FDTD-Dielectric folder under Materials folder of current project OptiFDTD_Designer1, Click Store button in the Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model dialog box to save this material to the project. b. In the In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1 of Profile Designer OptiFDTD, under Materials folder, right-click the FDTD-Dielectric folder. A context menu appears. Select New, the FDTD-Dielectric dialog box appears. By default the constant refractive index (Const Ref. Idx) is selected. Type the following information Name: n=1.5 Constant refractive index (isotropic) (Re): 1.5 Click Store to save this material, Material n=1.5 will be listed under the FDTD-Dielectric folder (the following sub-step c-d is to design the waveguide cross-section that will be used in the layout. ) c. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information: Profile name: Channel_Au Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Layer1 Width: 0.425 Thickness: 0.425 Offset: 0.0 In the Material list, select Gold_Au_Lorentz_Drude_Model Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. Channel_Au appears in the Channel folder. d. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information: Profile name: Channel_Air Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Layer1 Width: 0.2

429

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Thickness: 0.2 Offset: 0.0 In the Material list, select Air Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. Channel_Air appears in the Channel folder. e. In the directory under OptiFDTD_Designer1, under the Profiles folder, right click the Channel folder. A context menu appears. Select New. The Channel Profile dialog box appears. Type the following information: Profile name: Channel_SiO2 Under 3D profile definition: Type the following information: Layer name: Layer1 Width: 0.425 Thickness: 0.425 Offset: 0.0 In the Material list, select n=1.5 Click Add. To save the channel profile, click Store. Channel_SiO2 appears in the Channel folder 4 5 Return to Initial Properties dialog box of Waveguide Layout Designer. Either minimize or close the Waveguide Profile Designer. Type the following information in each corresponding area in Initial Properties dialog box Waveguide Properties: Width (

m ): 0.2

Profile: Channel_SiO2 Wafer Dimension

m ): 1.0 (z-direction dimension) Width ( m ): 0.425 (x-direction dimension)

Length ( 3D Wafer Properties Cladding Material: Air Cladding Thickness: 0.425(y-direction dimension) Substrate Material: Air Substrate Thickness: 0 (y-direction dimension) 6 Click OK in Initial Properties dialog box. OptiFDTD Designer[OptiFDTDigner1] window appears. Note: If not all Toolbars appear in the Layout Desinger window, you can change it from the View-Toolbars menu option. You can click + (zoom) toolbar button to enlarge the layout window.

430

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

You can open Wafer Properties from the Edit menu to modify simulation domain properties. Select Profiles and Materials from the Edit menu to open the Profile Designer where you can add and modify materials and profiles. Define an variable that will be used as the holes width Select Edit Parameters under Simulation menu. Variable and Function dialog box appears Click User Variable tab, define a variable Name as holewidth, expression as 0.247. Click Verify button to check the expression value, click Add/Apply button to add this variable in the list Click OK to finish the variable definition

Draw the substrate Select Linear Waveguide shape under Draw menu or form the shortcut toolbar In the layout window, drag the linear waveguide from the start point to the end point A linear waveguide appears in the layout window. Release the Linear Waveguide selection tool by clicking the Select tool after the Linear Waveguide is drawn in the layout. To adjust the position and the shape of this linear waveguide, double-click on the drawn waveguide. The Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box appears In the Linear Waveguide Properties dialog box, type the following values Start horizontal offset: 0.6 Start vertical offset : 0 End horizontal offset: 1.0 End vertical offset : 0 (z-direction start) (x-direction start) (z-direction start) (x-direction start)

Channel thickness tapering (waveguide thickness in y-direction) Unselect use default Select taper type as linear Start: 0.425 End: Depth: 0 0.425 (waveguide button to the y-direction original point) Width: 0.425 ( x-direction waveguide thickness) Label: Linear1 Profile: Channel_SiO2 9 Click OK to close the substrate waveguide setting. Draw the gold film layer Add a linear waveguide using the previous steps outlined in step 8 and set its properties using the properties listed below:

431

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Start horizontal offset: 0.4 Start vertical offset : 0 End horizontal offset: 0.6 End vertical offset : 0

(z-direction start) (x-direction start) (z-direction start) (x-direction start)

Channel thickness tapering (waveguide thickness in y-direction) Unselect use default Select taper type as linear Start: 0.425 End: Depth: 0 0.425 (waveguide button to the y-direction original point) Width: 0.425 ( x-direction waveguide thickness) Label: Linear2 Profile: Channel_Au 10 Draw the square Air hole. Follow the same manner in step 8 to design the Square Air hole with the following information Start horizontal offset: 0.399 Start vertical offset : 0 End horizontal offset: 0.6 End vertical offset : 0 (z-direction start) (x-direction start) (z-direction start) (x-direction start)

Channel thickness tapering (waveguide thickness in y-direction) Unselect use default Select taper type as linear Start: holewidth End: holewidth Width: holewidth ( x-direction waveguide thickness) Depth: 0.425/2-holewidth/2 (waveguide button to the y-direction original point) Label: Linear3 Profile: Channel_Air Note: You can parameterize the waveguide by entering a user-defined variable (parameter) in the Expression field. The expression fields are marked with "fx". For example you can enter StartPosZ (or an expression like 2*StartPosZ), in the Expression field of Horizontal position definition. Press the Evaluate button, to see the resulting Position value. If the specified parameter has not been defined, the software will prompt you to define it.

432

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

11

Click 3D Layout Model button under the layout window to observe the layout in 3d Mode Right click and move the mouse will move the graph center Right click and move the mouse will change the will angle Roll the mouse will zoom in and zoom out the graph.

Design VB script code to Scan the hole width

In the above step 10 we connected the Air hole dimension with the defined variable holewidth, In this section we will use a simple VB code to scan this variable. 1 2 Click Scripting Button under the Layout window. VB scripting page appears Copy the following VB code to this page. dim dWit For i=1 to 6 select case i case 1 dWit=0.148 case 2 dWit=0.165 case 3 dWit=0.187 case 4 dWit=0.196 case 5 dWit=0.231 case 6 dWit=0.247 case 7 dWit=0.266 end select ParamMgr.SetParam "holewidth", dWIt WGMgr.Sleep 500 ParamMgr.Simulate Next Note: The above code has six iterations, each iteration set a defined variable holewidth with a new value dWit 3 4 Click Layout button under the layout window to observe the layout. Click Test Script under Simulation Menu or click Play shortcut toolbar. This will run the VB code. A changing hole size will be observed in the layout window,

433

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Note: VB Script in OptiFDTD is a powerful tool for designing layout, scanning parameters, or even post-data analysis. For more details about VB script, please have a look on VB script reference or tutorial lesson15-16.

Define Input Wave

The Input Wave signal is defined within the Input Plane. To insert the Input Plane and set the excitation wave, follow the steps below: Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Draw menu, select Vertical Input Plane, or select Vertical Input Plane shortcut toolbar (The Vertical Input Plane is in the x-y plane for 3D.) Click in the layout window at the position where you want to insert the Input Plane. A red line that represents the input plane appears in the layout window. To set up the Input Plane properties, double-click the red line (Input Plane) in the layout window. The Input Field Properties dialog box appears. Set the time domain Input Plane basic information. a. a. Select Gaussian Modulated Continuous Wave. The Gaussian Modulated CW tab appears. b. b. Wavelength ( 5

m ): 0.68( m )

Click the Gaussian Modulated CW tab to set the time domain input waveform. The time domain pulse graphics appear. Type the following values for the time domain input plane Time offset (sec.): 0.8e-14 Half width (sec.): 0.1e-14 Note: Right Click on the graph and select the Zoom In tool to enlarge the selected graph region. You can observe the bandwidth in this way. Adjust half width can adjust the bandwidth To set up the general information (transverse field distribution) for the Input Plane, click the General tab Input Field Transverse: Rectangular( windowed plane wave) Z Position (

m ): 0.2

Plane Geometry: Positive direction Label: InputPlane1 (default) 7 Click 3D Transverse to setup the plane wave setting Center Position X: 0.0 ( Effective index: Local Polarization: Linear Y Halfwidth X: 0.5( m ) m ); Center Position Y: 0.4125 ( m ); Halfwidth Y: 0.5( m )

434

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Amplitude: 1.0 (V/m2)

To complete the Input plane setup, click OK.

Define Simulation Parameters

Step 1 2 Action From the Simulation menu, select Simulate 3D Using 64-bit Simulator. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Type the following values for the mesh size: Mesh Delta X (m): 0.005 Mesh Delta Y (m): 0.005 Mesh Delta Z (m): 0.005 3 To set up the boundary condition parameters, click Advanced. The Boundary Conditions dialog box appears. Set X and Y direction boundary condition as PBC Set z direction boundary condition as APML Type the following values for the PML boundary condition: Anisotropic PML layer number: 20 Theoretical Reflection Coefficient: 1.0e-12 Real Anisotropic PML Tensor Parameter: 70.0 Power of grading Polynomial: 3.5 4 5 6 Click OK to save changes Run for 12000 time steps Time sampling interval: 2 response sample points are used for the spectrum calculation. Click the Spectrum button to set the spectrum range 7 Set Number of Samples to 101, Uncheck the Auto checkbox, Check the Use Wavelength radio button Set Start wavelength as 0.5um Set end wavelength as 1.0um and press Ok button to accept changes

Click Ok button to accept the specified simulation parameters

Setup the Observation Objects (result data-detector)

For the 32-Bit FDTD simulation, observation objects will record all the time domain response so that spectrum analysis can be performed in analyzer. For 64-Bit FDTD simulation, Observation points will still record all the time domain response in each single point, but Observation area will perform the spectral analysis in simulator and save the spectrum DFT results to the analyzer file. For 64bit FDTD simulation,

435

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Observation Points or Observation Area must be present; otherwise simulations will not store any results for further analysis. Step 1 2 3 Action From the Draw menu (or the shortcut toolbar), select Observation xy plane. Place the Observation XY Area in the position after the sphere in the layout. Double-click the observation XY Area. The Observation Properties X-Y Area dialog box appears. Type the following values in the dialog box General

m ) Center Vertical Offset(x-direction): 0.0 m ) Center depth (y-direction): 0.2125 ( m ) X-Length 0.425 ( m ) Y-Length 0.425 ( m )
Center Horizontal Offset (z-drection): 0.1( Label: ObservationArea1 Data Components Ex, Ey, Hx, Hy 4 5 Click OK to close the dialog box Repeat step 1 to step 4 to designer another Observation area at z=0.1um General

m ) Center Vertical Offset(x-direction): 0.0( m ) Center depth (y-direction): 0.2125 ( m ) X-Length 0.425 ( m ) Y-Length 0.425 ( m )
Center Horizontal Offset (z-drection): 0.8( Label: ObservationArea2 Data Components Ex, Ey, Hx, Hy 6 In the same manner we can put observation point in the layout.

436

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Perform the VB scripting Scanning 64Bit-FDTD Simulation

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the Simulation menu, select the Simulate 3D using 64-Bit Simulator option. The 3D Simulation Parameters dialog box appears. Select Simulate Using VB script. This will do the VB script scanning simulation Click Run to start the simulation. The progress window appears, it displays status of the simulations. Visualization of intermediate simulation results. configure the snapshot settings. In the simulation progress window, select Simulation ->Take Snapshot menu option. The Set Snapshot dialog box appears Click Browse button to select the location of the output file Check the observation areas or observation points. The time domain response in the selected observation objects for the current time-step will be save to the file 5 6 Click OK to close this dialog box Click the Take Snapshot button in the simulation progress dialog box to save the time domain response in the current displayed time step Go to the folder where the snapshot is saved and with 2D or 3D Viewer observe the time domain response for a certain time step

Note: the simulation may need some time to finish. Simulation is suggested in the off-work time such as in the night so that you can get the results when you come back to work.

Post-Simulation Data Analysis

The simulation will generate 6 result files with the extension name as FDA. Open one result file can observe the field patterns and power transmission/reflection function: Step 1 Action Select Observation Area Analysis under the Tools menu in the Analyzer. Select Observation area button to active observation area analysis, Observation Area dialog box appears Select ObservationArea2 in the observation area check list Select wavelength 0.68 from the

2 3 4 5

f list box

Click Update Graph to observe the field pattern for this wavelength. Select Power Spectrum button, Power Spectrum dialog box appears, Select total Power Pz, Check Normalize With checkbox and click

437

LESSON 21 SIMULATION ON 3D SURFACE PLASMON BASED LAYOUT

Calculate button, PowerTransmission spectrum appears. Click Save As button will save the transmission spectrum to a file 6 7 Repeat step 6 for each result file, save the transmission spectrum the different file name Use OptiFDTD graph tool Opti 2D viewer to plot the power transmission spectrum in the same graph Select Opti 2D viewer under Start/All Programs/Optiwave software/OptiFDTD/opti 2D viewer Select Add under file menu to load each exported transmission spectrum file (refer to Figure 6)

Figure 6

Power transmission spectrum

438

Optiwave 7 Capella Court Ottawa, Ontario, K2E 8A7, Canada Tel.: 1.613.224.4700 Fax: 1.613.224.4706 E-mail: [email protected] URL: www.optiwave.com